# Stockful - full site content Every English page of stockful.app as Markdown, concatenated. Generated from the same build that produced the HTML. Index: https://stockful.app/llms.txt --- # Stockful · Inventory management for Shopify URL: https://stockful.app/ # Inventory management for Shopify Your inventory, with [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial ★ **5.0** on the Shopify App Store ![Stockful dashboard: inventory value, stock health and the SKUs that need attention](https://stockful.app/img/screenshots/hero.webp) ## Everything you tracked in Stocky. Plus an intelligent assistant. Stocky leaves Shopify on 31 August 2026. Stockful replaces the part you lived in - daily snapshots, reports, forecasting and low-stock alerts - then adds an AI assistant and two years of history. Your suppliers and purchase-order history come with you. [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky ›](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) What you get 2 years of daily snapshots 100+ built-in reports, scheduled Forecasts that learn each product's seasonality Low-stock alerts to Slack Your Stocky suppliers and PO history, imported ## Ask your shop. Get a straight answer. The assistant is on every plan. Ask in plain English, run one-click health checks, and get any number explained, all grounded in your live data. Ask anything Health check Explain every metric Anomaly alerts Stockful assistant What should I reorder before the weekend? Three lines are close to stocking out at your current sell rate: Merino Crew - Charcoal / M 4 days Trail Sock - Black / L 6 days Insulated Bottle - 750ml 9 days Ask anything about your inventory… ## One forecast per product. Proven on your history. Stockful fits a separate model to every SKU at every location, trained on up to two years of your Shopify sales history. Seasonal peaks are learned per product, slow movers get their own model, and every forecast keeps proving itself against what actually sold. Seasonality learned per product Dedicated slow-mover model Up to 2 years of history Self-tracked accuracy Demand forecast Merino Crew - Charcoal / M Last year Today +90 days Sold Forecast Reorder point ## Raise a purchase order without leaving Stockful Reorder recommendations group into one draft order per supplier. Send it as a branded PDF or straight to your supplier by email, receive stock as it arrives, and let shipping and duties land on your true unit cost. One draft order per supplier, from your recommendations Send by email, branded PDF or packing slip Partial receipts, landed cost, multi-currency Purchase order PO-1042 Sent | Product | Supplier SKU | Qty | Unit cost | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Merino Crew - Charcoal / M | AW-MRC-CHR-M | 120 | £14.00 | £1,680.00 | | Trail Sock - Black / L | AW-TRS-BLK-L | 200 | £3.20 | £640.00 | | Insulated Bottle - 750ml | AW-INB-750 | 60 | £6.50 | £390.00 | Subtotal: £2,710.00 Shipping & duties: £214.00 Landed total: £2,924.00 Draft Sent Receiving Closed [See how purchase orders work ›](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) Stocky vs Stockful ## The monitoring half of Stocky. Made smarter. Everything Stocky did for tracking and reporting, plus the AI and history it never had. |   | Stocky | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | AI chat assistant | No | Ask anything, grounded in your shop | | One-click health check | No | Scans 5 dimensions, 25 findings | | Explain every metric | No | Plain-English on every value | | Anomaly detection | No | Spikes & drops with likely causes | | Daily inventory snapshots | No history | Per variant & location, up to 2 years | | Reports | Limited built-in | 100+ reports, scheduled delivery | | ABC analysis | No | Built-in, runs automatically | | Demand forecasting | Basic - seasonality set by hand | Seasonality learned per product, self-tracked accuracy | | Slack alerts | No | Custom rules & reorder points | | Purchase orders | Yes - retiring with Stocky | Native: suppliers, receiving, landed cost | | Shopify Flow integration | No | 10 triggers, 9 actions | Two years of history ### Not just today's stock. Every day of it. Stockful captures a daily snapshot of every variant at every location, so you can see how stock moved, spot the trends, and know exactly when things ran low. - A year of daily history, backfilled at install - Per variant and per location, up to 2 years - OOS-aware velocity, not just raw sales Inventory value £424.9K▲ 4% Jul 2024 Jul 2025 Jul 2026 5.0 on the Shopify App Store Loved by the merchants who switched. Stockful's been a great help to us with its reporting features. We've been able to remove annoying workflows that helped us track our inventory and replace them all with this one app. Having daily and weekly reports exported and automatically sent to the right people really helped us to stay in sync with our inventory. **Bohomoon** Shopify App Store review Love this app - extremely helpful for keeping an eye on inventory velocities and reorder notifications. UI is very nice and intuitive, and the data is presented clearly. I wish we had this app years ago. **ALP Pouches** Shopify App Store review Really impressed with Stockful. The app is simple to set up and easy to use day-to-day. I requested a feature from the developer and it was live in the app in under a week. Setting up notifications in Slack was straightforward, so I no longer have to manually check inventory levels. It just runs in the background and pings me when something needs attention. Highly recommended. **Krisesikker.no** Shopify App Store review Pricing ## Every feature on every plan. Plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. No feature gating, AI included, 14-day free trial. ### Included on every plan AI, forecasting, purchasing, analytics and alerts on all tiers. AI usage allowance scales with the plan you choose. - AI assistant, health check, explain - Anomaly detection with likely causes - Self-tuning, seasonality-aware forecasts - Purchase orders with suppliers and price lists - Landed cost, multi-currency and receiving - Up to 2 years of daily history - Scheduled reports and Slack alerts - Storefront data and Flow integration - Raw materials, BOMs and production Starter For stores ready to scale $19.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 2,000 tracked SKUs - 1 location [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_content=pricing-starter) Growth Most popular For growing stores with multiple locations $39.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 7,500 tracked SKUs - Up to 5 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_content=pricing-growth) Pro For large stores with advanced needs $79.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 15,000 tracked SKUs - Up to 10 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_content=pricing-pro) FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### Is Stocky really being discontinued? Yes. Shopify is removing Stocky on 31 August 2026, so merchants relying on it for inventory monitoring, reporting and forecasting need a replacement in place before then. ### Can I use Stockful as a direct Stocky replacement? Yes, for everything you used Stocky to track: daily history, reports, forecasting, low-stock alerts and transfer suggestions - plus native purchase orders with suppliers, price lists, receiving and landed cost, and an AI assistant on top that Stocky never had. ### Can I bring my data across from Stocky? Yes. Stockful's import wizard connects to Stocky's API and brings across your suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments. Everything imports as net-new records, so re-running it never duplicates, and it never touches your live inventory. Stocky's API goes away on 31 August 2026, so the import has to happen before then. ### Does Stockful use AI? Yes. You can chat with your shop to ask what to reorder or why demand moved, run one-click health checks, get plain-English explanations on every metric, and see anomaly alerts with likely causes. ### How does pricing work? Transparent tiers with every feature included on every plan, plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. There's a 14-day free trial to start. ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # About Stockful · Shopify inventory forecasting, purchasing and reporting URL: https://stockful.app/about About # About Stockful A Shopify inventory app built around the decisions that actually cost money: what to reorder, when, and how much. ## What Stockful is Stockful is an inventory management, forecasting and reporting app for Shopify stores. It installs from the [Shopify App Store](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=about&utm_content=about), reads your catalogue, locations and order history, and turns them into the numbers a merchant needs to keep stock moving: demand forecasts, reorder recommendations, purchase orders, transfer suggestions, over a hundred reports, and alerts that fire before a SKU runs out rather than after. The organisation behind the app is **Stockful**. Our terms of service are governed by the laws of England and Wales, and every policy that covers your data - privacy, data processing, security incident response - is published in full on the [documentation site](https://docs.stockful.app). ## What the app does - **Tracking and history.** Daily snapshots of stock at every Shopify location, with up to two years of daily history - well past the 180 days of adjustment history Shopify itself retains. - **Demand forecasting.** Self-tuning, seasonality-aware models with automatic sale detection, per-SKU overrides for lead time and safety stock, and measured forecast accuracy. - **Purchasing.** Reorder recommendations, native purchase orders with suppliers and price lists, receiving, landed cost across freight, duty and fees, transfer suggestions between locations, and a cash-out schedule for what you will need to spend and when. - **Reporting.** Over a hundred built-in reports plus a report builder driven by StockfulQL, our query language. Export to CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL, or schedule delivery to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. - **Alerts and anomalies.** Unlimited stock alerts to Slack or email on every plan, and a nightly scan that flags SKUs whose sales velocity has shifted out of pattern, each with a short written explanation. - **AI.** An in-app assistant that answers questions against your live inventory, a weekly digest, Shopify Sidekick support, and a remote MCP server so Claude, Cursor, VS Code, Gemini CLI or ChatGPT can read the same data directly. ## Who it is for Shopify merchants who have outgrown a spreadsheet: stores carrying enough SKUs that reorder timing is a real decision, stores holding stock in more than one location, and stores that need a paper trail behind every adjustment. It is also the app many merchants move to when leaving Stocky, which Shopify is retiring on 31 August 2026 - Stockful imports Stocky's suppliers, price lists, purchase orders and stock adjustments. ## How we handle your store's data Stockful reads your Shopify data through the Admin API and webhooks. It does not change your stock levels, products or orders as a side effect of analysis; the one thing it writes back is stock you record as received against a purchase order. All data is scoped to your shop with row-level security, and individual customer personal data from order records is discarded during aggregation rather than stored. Billing runs entirely through Shopify, so we never see card details. The full list of subprocessors, what each one receives, and your rights over the data are set out in the [privacy policy](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/privacy-policy) and the [terms of service](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/terms-of-service). ## Talk to us Email [support@stockful.app](mailto:support@stockful.app) and a real person replies, usually within one business day. You do not need an account or an active subscription to get in touch. See the [contact page](https://stockful.app/contact) for what to include, and [developer resources](https://stockful.app/developers) if you are integrating with Stockful programmatically. Registered organisation: Stockful, 20 Wenlock Road, London, England, N1 7GU, United Kingdom. --- # AI for Shopify Inventory - Chat & Health Checks | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/ai # AI for your Shopify inventory. Stockful's AI assistant answers questions about your shop in plain English, runs one-click health checks across forecasting and tracking, and explains any metric on demand. Every plan includes the full AI feature set, with a per-cycle usage allowance sized to the plan. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=ai&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. Full AI feature set on every plan. ## Shopify Native vs Stockful AI |   | Shopify Native | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | AI chat assistant | Not available | Ask anything - grounded in your shop data | | One-click health check | Not available | Scans 5 dimensions, surfaces 25 findings | | Explain every metric | Not available | Plain-English explanations on every value | | Anomaly detection with hypotheses | Not available | Surfaces spikes and drops with likely causes | | Smart setup wizard | Not available | AI-proposed config based on your catalog | | Weekly AI summary | Not available | Opt-in Slack digest on your schedule | | Cost of AI features | N/A | Included; usage allowance scales by plan (100 / 500 / 1,000 per cycle) | ## What the AI does ### Chat assistant grounded in your data Ask the assistant what to reorder, why a SKU spiked, what to exclude from tracking, or what's at risk this week. Answers are streamed in plain English and grounded in your actual Shopify data - not generic advice. ### One-click health check across your whole shop Scans 5 dimensions of your shop - data quality, catalog quality, tracking config, forecasting health, and alert health - and surfaces 25 specific findings with severity ratings and one-click fix links. ### Explain any metric, on demand Click 'Explain' on any number in the app - days of supply, velocity, ABC class, reorder point, projected stockout - and get a plain-English explanation grounded in your shop's data. No more guessing what a metric means or why it's that value. ### Anomaly detection with hypotheses When something unusual happens in your shop - a sales spike, sudden velocity drop, a SKU going out of stock unexpectedly - Stockful surfaces it on the anomalies page with a one-sentence likely cause. Subscribe to anomaly Slack alerts on your schedule. ### Smart setup wizard for new shops New shops don't start with an empty form. Stockful's AI analyses your catalog and proposes exclusion rules, low-stock thresholds, and tracking config tailored to your business - so you can get to first useful insights in under five minutes. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### Is the AI a separate plan or add-on? No add-on. Every Stockful plan ($19.99 Starter / $39.99 Growth / $79.99 Pro per month) includes the full AI feature set - assistant, health check, explain, anomaly detection, smart setup wizard. What scales with the plan is the per-billing-cycle usage allowance: 100 merchant-initiated AI interactions on Starter, 500 on Growth, 1,000 on Pro. The allowance resets each Shopify billing cycle. ### What can I ask the AI assistant? Anything about your inventory. Common questions: 'What should I reorder this week?', 'Why did SKU X spike?', 'What's at risk this week?', 'What should I exclude from tracking?', 'Show me my slowest-moving A items'. The assistant is grounded in your actual shop data so answers reference real variants, locations, and metrics. ### How does the health check work? Click one button in /settings/health-check and Stockful scans your shop across 5 dimensions: data quality, catalog quality, tracking config, forecasting health, and alert health. It surfaces 25 specific findings with critical, warning, or info severity - each with a one-click fix link to the exact setting that needs attention. ### How is the 'Explain' button different from a tooltip? Tooltips define what a metric is. Explain tells you why this metric is this value in your shop. It uses your actual data - the sales, velocity, lead times, and stockouts behind the number - to give you a plain-English explanation specific to the SKU and location you're looking at. ### Do I have to use any of the AI features? No. There's a master AI toggle in settings. With it off, the assistant, health check, explain, and anomalies are all disabled. The opt-in subscriptions for weekly summaries and anomaly Slack alerts are off by default even when AI is on. ### Is my data used to train AI models? No. When you use an AI feature, relevant shop context is sent to our model provider for inference only. It is not used for model training. No data leaves your shop until you actually invoke an AI feature. See our privacy policy for full detail. ### What about anomaly detection - does it spam me with alerts? No. Anomaly Slack alerts are opt-in and you choose the day and time they fire in your local timezone. Anomalies appear on your /anomalies page whether or not you've subscribed to alerts - so you can review them at your own pace. ### How much do AI features cost on top of my plan? Nothing on top. The full AI feature set is included on every plan. Each plan includes a per-billing-cycle allowance of merchant-initiated AI interactions (chat turns and Explain clicks): 100 on Starter, 500 on Growth, 1,000 on Pro. Background AI work doesn't count. Hit 80% of your allowance and Stockful surfaces an upgrade nudge; hit 100% and AI chat pauses until the next cycle while everything else in Stockful keeps working. ### What happens if I hit my AI usage allowance? If you reach 80% of your plan's allowance, Stockful shows an in-app banner suggesting you upgrade. If you reach 100%, AI chat and on-demand Explain pause until your next Shopify billing cycle starts. Everything else in Stockful - daily snapshots, reports, alerts, Flow triggers, forecasting, anomaly detection display - keeps working. Background AI work (the weekly digest, anomaly hypotheses, smart setup) is on us and continues regardless. ## Explore more [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=ai&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # The Stockful blog · inventory strategy for Shopify merchants URL: https://stockful.app/blog The Stockful blog # Inventory strategy for Shopify merchants. Practical guides on reordering, forecasting, analytics and getting the most out of your stock. No fluff. All [ABC Analysis](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/ABC%20Analysis) [Dead Stock](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Dead%20Stock) [Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Demand%20Forecasting) [Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Inventory%20Management) [Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Inventory%20Reports) [Multi-Location](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Multi-Location) [Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Purchase%20Orders) [Reorder Management](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Reorder%20Management) [Slack Alerts](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Slack%20Alerts) [Stocky](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Stocky) [Inventory Reports ## The Inventory Questions You Could Not Answer Before Stockful's fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine: over 100 reports that run live, a builder for the questions nobody wrote a report for, and delivery to five channels. 17 Aug 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-inventory-reporting-engine) [Inventory Reports ### What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You (and the Number Most Stores Get Wrong) Sell-through rate is simple to calculate and easy to misread. What it really signals about buying and pricing, and how to track it across your catalogue. 10 Aug 2026 · 3 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify)[Reorder Management ### How Much Safety Stock Is Enough (Without Tying Up Cash)? Too little safety stock means stockouts; too much drains cash. How to size safety stock per SKU using your real demand variability and lead times. 3 Aug 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify)[Reorder Management ### Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands The classic reorder point formula assumes steady demand and fixed lead times. DTC has neither. What goes wrong, and how to set reorder points that hold. 27 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify)[Inventory Management ### How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify)[Reorder Management ### From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order)[Demand Forecasting ### How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade)[Inventory Management ### How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory)[Inventory Management ### The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify)[Stocky ### Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app)[Stocky ### How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify)[Stocky ### Your Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 Stocky shuts down 31 August 2026. Export your suppliers, purchase orders and costs before they vanish. A step-by-step checklist of what to save and how. 15 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown)[Inventory Management ### Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor Stockful's MCP server connects your inventory to the AI tools you already use. Ask about stock, forecasts and margins, and act with confirmation. 8 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt)[Inventory Management ### Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock)[Inventory Management ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Inventory Management ### Shopify Inventory Counts: How to Run Cycle Counts Without Shutting Down Full inventory counts disrupt your operation. Cycle counting is faster, less painful, and keeps your stock accurate year-round. Here's how. 14 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-cycle-counts-inventory)[Inventory Management ### How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026)[Inventory Management ### Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful)[Inventory Management ### Sell-Through Rate Explained: The Shopify Metric You're Probably Ignoring Sell-through rate shows how fast your inventory turns into sales. Here's how to calculate it, what good looks like, and why it matters. 4 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify)[Reorder Management ### How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores)[Inventory Management ### Shopify Inventory Valuation: Understanding What Your Stock Is Actually Worth Your inventory is probably your biggest asset. Here's how to understand what it's actually worth and why Shopify's native tools fall short. 27 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-valuation)[Inventory Management ### How to Calculate Safety Stock for Your Shopify Store Safety stock prevents stockouts when demand spikes or suppliers run late. Here's how to calculate it for your Shopify products. 23 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify)[Inventory Management ### Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days of History Isn't Enough Shopify only keeps 180 days of inventory adjustment history. Here's why that's a problem and what you can do about it. 20 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit)[Inventory Management ### Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields)[Inventory Management ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Demand Forecasting ### Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide)[Inventory Management ### What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores)[Dead Stock ### How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store Dead stock silently drains cash from your Shopify store. Here's how to identify it, calculate what it's costing you, and clear it out. 9 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify)[Multi-Location ### Managing Inventory Across Multiple Shopify Locations Without Spreadsheets Running multiple Shopify locations? Here's how to track, balance, and report on inventory across warehouses and stores without spreadsheets. 6 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/multi-location-shopify-inventory-management)[Inventory Reports ### The Shopify Inventory Reports You're Not Getting (and How to Fix It) Shopify's built-in inventory reports have major gaps. Here are the reports you're missing and how to get the data you actually need. 2 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing)[ABC Analysis ### How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory Learn how ABC analysis helps Shopify merchants focus on their most profitable products, cut dead stock, and make smarter reorder decisions. 30 Mar 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory)[Stocky ### Stocky Is Being Removed From Shopify: What Merchants Need to Do Now Stocky is shutting down on August 31, 2026. Learn what’s changing in Shopify inventory management, what features you’re losing, what Shopify offers as a replacement, and the exact steps merchants should take now to migrate smoothly. 29 Mar 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) --- # How to Use ABC Analysis on Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory Learn how ABC analysis helps Shopify merchants focus on their most profitable products, cut dead stock, and make smarter reorder decisions. 30 Mar 2026 · 6 min read Not every product in your store deserves the same attention. Some SKUs drive the bulk of your revenue. Others sit in storage burning through cash. The trick is knowing which is which, and that is exactly what ABC analysis does. ABC analysis is one of the simplest, most effective frameworks for prioritizing your inventory. It groups your products into three categories based on their revenue contribution, so you can focus your time, budget, and warehouse space on the items that actually matter. If you are running a Shopify store with more than a handful of SKUs, this is one of the first things you should set up. ## What ABC analysis actually is ABC analysis is based on the Pareto principle: roughly 80% of your results come from 20% of your inputs. Applied to inventory, it means a small number of your products likely generate the vast majority of your revenue. The framework splits your catalogue into three groups: **A items** are your top performers. They typically make up around 10-20% of your SKUs but account for 70-80% of your total revenue. These are the products you absolutely cannot afford to run out of. **B items** sit in the middle. They represent roughly 20-30% of your SKUs and contribute around 15-20% of revenue. They are important but do not require the same level of attention as your A items. **C items** are the long tail. They often make up 50% or more of your total SKU count but generate only 5-10% of revenue. Many of these are candidates for reduced stock levels, discontinuation, or clearance. The exact percentages will vary for every store, but the pattern is remarkably consistent across industries. ## Why Shopify merchants should care Most Shopify merchants reorder stock based on gut feeling or simple low-stock alerts. The problem with this approach is that it treats every product equally. You end up spending as much time and budget restocking a product that sells twice a month as you do on one that sells fifty times a day. ABC analysis fixes this by giving you a clear framework for where to focus: **Reorder priorities.** Your A items should have the tightest reorder points and the most safety stock. Running out of these costs you real money. Your C items, on the other hand, might not need to be reordered at all. **Warehouse layout.** If you pick and pack your own orders, your A items should be in the most accessible locations. Every second saved per pick adds up across thousands of orders. **Cash flow management.** When cash is tight, you know exactly where to invest. Put your purchasing budget into A items first, B items second, and C items only when you have room. **Supplier negotiations.** When you know which products drive 80% of your revenue, you can negotiate harder on those specific supplier relationships. Volume discounts, better payment terms, and priority fulfilment all become easier to justify. ## How to run ABC analysis on your Shopify store You can do this manually in a spreadsheet, though it gets tedious with larger catalogues. Here is the process: **Step 1: Export your sales data.** Pull a sales report from Shopify covering the last 6-12 months. You want product-level revenue data, not just unit counts. A product that sells 10 units at $500 each matters more than one that sells 100 units at $2. **Step 2: Sort by revenue.** Arrange your products from highest to lowest total revenue for the period. **Step 3: Calculate cumulative percentages.** For each product, calculate what percentage of total revenue it represents, then create a running cumulative total. **Step 4: Assign categories.** Products in the top 80% of cumulative revenue are A items. The next 15% are B items. The remaining 5% are C items. **Step 5: Review and adjust.** The raw numbers are a starting point. Some products might be new and underrepresented in historical data. Others might be seasonal. Use judgement alongside the data. The manual approach works, but the classification goes stale quickly. Your top sellers from six months ago might not be your top sellers today. Ideally you want this analysis running continuously against live data. Tools like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) automate ABC analysis for Shopify stores, recalculating classifications based on ongoing sales data so the categories stay current without you rebuilding a spreadsheet every month. ## What to do with each category Running the analysis is only useful if you act on it. Here is how to handle each group: ### A items: protect at all costs These are your revenue drivers. Set aggressive reorder points so you never stock out. Monitor sell-through rates weekly. If a supplier for an A item has long lead times, consider holding more safety stock or finding a backup supplier. Every day an A item is out of stock, you are losing meaningful revenue. ### B items: monitor and optimise B items deserve regular attention but not daily monitoring. Review them monthly. Some B items are on their way to becoming A items, and you want to spot that early. Others are slipping toward C territory and may need a pricing adjustment or promotional push. ### C items: be ruthless This is where most merchants leave money on the table. Your C items take up warehouse space, tie up capital, and require the same operational overhead as everything else. Ask yourself: if this product disappeared tomorrow, would anyone notice? If the answer is no, consider discontinuing it, running a clearance sale, or reducing your reorder quantity to the bare minimum. Some C items exist for strategic reasons, like completing a product line or serving a niche customer segment. That is fine. Just make sure you are keeping them deliberately, not by default. ## Common mistakes to avoid **Running the analysis only once.** Products shift between categories as demand changes. An analysis from January might be wrong by June. Automate it or schedule regular reviews. **Using units sold instead of revenue.** A product that sells 1,000 units at $1 each is not as important as one that sells 50 units at $200 each. Always use revenue as your primary metric. **Ignoring seasonality.** If you sell swimwear and winter coats, running a 12-month analysis will smooth out seasonal peaks. Consider running separate analyses for different seasons, or at least accounting for seasonal patterns when you review the results. **Treating the categories as permanent.** ABC analysis is a snapshot, not a label. Products should move between categories based on performance. If you tag a product as C and never look at it again, you will miss the ones that start gaining traction. ## Start with the data you have ABC analysis does not require fancy tools or perfect data. You can start with a Shopify sales export and a spreadsheet this afternoon. The key insight, that a small number of products drive most of your revenue, will likely surprise you the first time you see it laid out clearly. Once you have that visibility, every inventory decision gets sharper: what to reorder, how much safety stock to hold, where to invest, and what to let go. ## Further reading - [How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify) - [What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) - [The Shopify Inventory Reports You’re Not Getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [ABC Analysis for Shopify with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) - [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) _Want ABC analysis running automatically on your Shopify store? \[Stockful\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app)) classifies your entire catalogue by revenue contribution and updates the categories as your sales data changes. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How to Calculate Safety Stock for Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Calculate Safety Stock for Your Shopify Store Safety stock prevents stockouts when demand spikes or suppliers run late. Here's how to calculate it for your Shopify products. 23 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Every Shopify merchant has experienced it: a product sells faster than expected, or a supplier delivers late, and suddenly you are staring at a stockout. Customers leave, revenue disappears, and if you are selling on marketplaces, your rankings take a hit. Safety stock is the buffer that prevents this. It is extra inventory you keep on hand specifically to absorb the unexpected, whether that is a demand spike, a delayed shipment, or both at once. The question is: how much safety stock should you carry? Too little and you still stock out. Too much and you are tying up cash in inventory that sits idle. Here is how to get the number right. ## What safety stock actually is Safety stock is not your regular inventory. Your regular (or cycle) stock is the inventory you expect to sell between reorders. Safety stock sits underneath that as a buffer. Think of it this way: if your average daily sales are 10 units and your supplier takes 14 days to deliver, you need at least 140 units of cycle stock to cover the lead time. Safety stock is the extra inventory on top of that 140 to protect against things not going according to plan. Those “things” fall into two categories. Demand variability is when customers buy more than your average. Lead time variability is when your supplier takes longer than expected. Safety stock needs to cover both. ## The simple formula (and when to use it) If you want a quick, practical starting point, use this formula: **Safety Stock = (Max Daily Sales x Max Lead Time) - (Average Daily Sales x Average Lead Time)** Here is a worked example. Say you sell a product that averages 20 units per day but has peaked at 35 units on busy days. Your supplier normally delivers in 10 days, but has taken as long as 16 days. Safety Stock = (35 x 16) - (20 x 10) = 560 - 200 = 360 units This formula is sometimes called the “max-max” method because it protects against the worst case: maximum demand happening at the same time as maximum lead time. It is conservative by design, which means it tends to overestimate the safety stock you need. For most Shopify merchants with a manageable number of SKUs and relatively stable demand, this formula is a perfectly reasonable starting point. If you find yourself carrying too much buffer, you can dial it back. ## A more precise approach for variable demand If your sales are highly variable (seasonal products, trending items, products driven by promotions), the max-max formula can produce an unnecessarily large buffer. In that case, a statistical approach gives you more control. The statistical formula is: **Safety Stock = Z x Standard Deviation of Daily Demand x Square Root of Lead Time** Z is a “service level factor” that represents how confident you want to be that you will not stock out. Common values: 1.28 for 90% confidence, 1.65 for 95%, and 2.33 for 99%. Standard deviation of daily demand measures how much your daily sales vary from the average. You can calculate this in a spreadsheet: list your daily sales figures for the past 60-90 days and use the STDEV function. Square root of lead time converts the daily variability into the variability over your full lead time period. Worked example: your product averages 20 units per day with a standard deviation of 8 units. Lead time is 10 days. You want 95% confidence (Z = 1.65). Safety Stock = 1.65 x 8 x sqrt(10) = 1.65 x 8 x 3.16 = about 42 units Compare that to 360 units from the max-max formula. The statistical approach is dramatically more efficient because it does not plan for the absolute worst case, just a very likely range of outcomes. ## Where to get the data from Shopify To calculate safety stock, you need two things: sales history and lead time data. **Sales data.** Export your sales by product from Shopify’s Analytics section. You want daily unit counts for each product over at least 60 days (longer is better). Calculate both the average daily sales and the standard deviation. **Lead time data.** Shopify does not track supplier lead times natively. You will need to record this yourself: note the date you place each purchase order and the date inventory arrives. After a few order cycles, you will have a reliable average and maximum lead time. The challenge is doing this for every SKU. For stores with 50+ products, manually calculating safety stock in a spreadsheet is time-consuming and goes stale quickly. This is where inventory tools earn their keep by automating the calculation against live data. ## Matching safety stock to product importance Not every product needs the same level of protection. Carrying 99% confidence safety stock on your entire catalogue is expensive and unnecessary. Use your ABC analysis (if you have done one) to set different service levels: **A items (top revenue drivers):** 95-99% service level. You cannot afford to stock out on these. The safety stock investment is justified by the revenue they generate. **B items (mid-tier):** 90-95% service level. Important but not critical. A slightly lower buffer saves cash without major risk. **C items (long tail):** 85-90% service level, or no safety stock at all. If a C item stocks out for a few days, the financial impact is minimal. Some C items may not be worth reordering at all. This tiered approach lets you protect your most valuable products while keeping your overall inventory investment reasonable. ## Common safety stock mistakes **Setting it once and forgetting it.** Demand changes. Lead times change. Suppliers improve or get worse. Recalculate safety stock at least quarterly, or use a tool that updates it dynamically. **Using the same buffer for every product.** A blanket “keep 2 weeks of extra stock for everything” approach over-invests in slow movers and under-invests in fast movers. **Ignoring lead time variability.** Many merchants focus on demand swings but forget that a supplier delivering in 21 days instead of 14 is just as dangerous. Factor both into your calculation. **Not accounting for stockout periods.** If a product was out of stock for a week last month, your average daily sales for that month are artificially low. Adjust the calculation to reflect what demand would have been if you had stock available. ## Safety stock is an investment, not a cost It is easy to see safety stock as dead inventory. But when it prevents a stockout on your best-selling product during a demand spike, it pays for itself many times over. The key is being deliberate about how much you carry and for which products, rather than guessing or applying the same rule everywhere. Start with the simple formula for your top 10 products. See how the numbers compare to what you are actually carrying. Adjust from there. _Stockful’s reorder report factors in your sales velocity, current stock levels, and lead times to help you set smarter safety stock levels for every product. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*[How Much Safety Stock Is Enough](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify) looks at sizing it without tying up cash. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Guide | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Demand forecasting is predicting how much of each product you will sell over a future period. Done well, it tells you what to order, how much to order, and when to place the order so stock arrives before you run out. Done badly (or not at all), it leads to two expensive problems: stockouts on your best sellers and overstock on everything else. Shopify does not include demand forecasting in its native tools. The recently retired Stocky app had basic forecasting, but it was widely regarded as unreliable, and it is shutting down entirely in August 2026. So if you want to forecast demand for your Shopify store, you need to build a process yourself or use a dedicated tool. Here is a practical guide to getting started. ## Why forecasting matters for Shopify merchants Forecasting might sound like something only large retailers need. But the smaller your business, the more a single bad purchasing decision hurts. If you over-order a product, you tie up cash that could have been spent on marketing or faster-selling inventory. If you under-order, you stock out and lose sales. Research suggests that 69% of online shoppers will buy from a competitor when their preferred item is unavailable. You do not get most of those customers back. Forecasting helps you: **Buy the right quantities.** No more guessing whether to order 100 or 500 units. Base your purchasing on projected demand. **Time your orders correctly.** Account for supplier lead times so stock arrives before you run out, but not so early that it sits idle. **Plan for seasonality.** If you sell seasonal products, forecasting helps you ramp up before peak periods and reduce orders before demand drops. **Manage cash flow.** Forecasting turns inventory purchasing from a series of reactive decisions into a planned budget. ## The simple approach: moving averages You do not need machine learning or a data science background to forecast demand. The simplest approach that actually works is a moving average. Here is how: **Step 1: Pull your sales history.** Export product-level sales data from Shopify for the last 3-6 months (longer is better if you have it). **Step 2: Calculate average daily sales.** For each product, divide total units sold by the number of days in the period. If you sold 300 units over 90 days, your average daily demand is about 3.3 units. **Step 3: Project forward.** Multiply your average daily demand by the number of days you want to forecast. For a 30-day forecast: 3.3 x 30 = about 100 units. **Step 4: Factor in lead time.** If your supplier needs 14 days to deliver, you need to order at least 14 days before you expect to run out. Your reorder point is: daily demand x lead time = 3.3 x 14 = about 47 units. When stock hits 47 units, it is time to reorder. **Step 5: Add a safety buffer.** Demand is not perfectly consistent. Add 10-20% to your reorder point as safety stock to account for variability. So your practical reorder point becomes about 52-56 units. This approach will not win any awards for sophistication, but it is dramatically better than guessing. ## Accounting for seasonality The moving average approach works well for products with stable demand but falls apart for seasonal items. If you sell Christmas decorations, your average daily sales over 12 months will be wildly misleading. For seasonal products, you need to look at the same period from the previous year (or years) rather than a rolling average. Compare this March to last March, not to the last 90 days. This is where Shopify’s 180-day data limitation becomes a real problem. If you can only see six months of history, you cannot compare year-over-year patterns. You need either your own historical records or a tool that captures longer-term data. [Stockful](https://stockful.app) pulls up to 2 years of your sales history from Shopify and [learns each product’s seasonal pattern automatically](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) - so Christmas lines, summer lines, and BFCM spikes are forecast from their own history, with no manual “same period last year” comparisons. ## Common forecasting mistakes **Forecasting from stock-out periods.** If a product was out of stock for two weeks last month, your average daily sales for that month are artificially low. You did not have zero demand during those two weeks; you had zero supply. Adjust your calculations to exclude (or estimate demand during) stockout periods. (Stockful does this automatically: out-of-stock days are excluded from velocity, and the sales lost to stockouts are quantified.) **Ignoring lead time variability.** Your supplier says 14 days, but sometimes it is 10 and sometimes it is 21. Use the longest realistic lead time for your reorder calculations, not the optimistic estimate. **Treating all products the same.** Your A items (top revenue drivers) deserve more careful forecasting than your C items. Invest your time where the financial impact is greatest. **Not reviewing forecasts against actuals.** Forecasting is an iterative process. After each order cycle, compare what you predicted to what actually sold. Adjust your method based on where the forecast was off. **Over-relying on automation.** Automated forecasting tools are helpful, but they cannot account for things like an upcoming promotion, a competitor going out of stock, or a product going viral on social media. Always layer human judgement on top of the numbers. ## When to invest in a forecasting tool The manual approach works for stores with a small number of SKUs and relatively stable demand. You will outgrow it when: You have more than 50-100 active SKUs. Manually forecasting each product becomes impractical. Your products have different demand patterns (seasonal, trending, stable). A single method does not fit all of them. You are making purchasing decisions weekly or more frequently. The manual process cannot keep up. You sell across multiple locations and need per-location forecasts. At that point, look for a tool that connects to your Shopify data, calculates forecasts automatically, and provides reorder recommendations. The best tools combine historical sales data with current stock levels and supplier lead times to give you specific, actionable guidance on what to buy and when. This is how [Stockful’s demand forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) works: it fits five candidate models to every SKU at every location - a flat baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality, and an intermittent-demand model for slow sellers - and only adopts a richer model when it beats the baseline on that SKU’s own history. Every forecast tracks its own accuracy, so you can see how it is doing rather than taking it on faith. ## Start simple, improve over time The goal of forecasting is not perfection. It is being less wrong than you were when you were guessing. Even a simple moving average will improve your purchasing decisions over intuition alone. Start with your top 10-20 products (your A items from ABC analysis). Forecast demand for the next 30 days. Place your orders based on the forecast instead of gut feeling. Compare results. Refine. Forecasting is a skill that gets better with practice. The important thing is to start. ## Further reading - [What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days Isn’t Enough](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit) - [How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [Demand Forecasting for Shopify with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) - [Shopify Inventory Management with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) _Stockful forecasts demand per SKU with self-tuning models, then combines that with your current stock levels and supplier lead times to recommend what to buy and when. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How Much Safety Stock Is Enough? | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How Much Safety Stock Is Enough (Without Tying Up Cash)? Too little safety stock means stockouts; too much drains cash. How to size safety stock per SKU using your real demand variability and lead times. 3 Aug 2026 · 4 min read Safety stock is the buffer that keeps you in stock when demand spikes or a shipment turns up late. Hold too little and you stock out at the worst moment. Hold too much and you have turned working capital into a pile of boxes. The whole skill is sizing it right, and sizing it differently for each product. Most advice hands you a formula and stops. The harder, more useful part is deciding how much you actually need per SKU, and what it costs you to get it wrong in either direction. ## What safety stock is actually for Safety stock is insurance against two specific uncertainties during your supplier’s lead time: demand coming in higher than expected, and the shipment arriving later than expected. If both demand and lead time were perfectly predictable, you would need none. They never are, so you hold a buffer to cover the gap between the expected case and a realistic bad case. That framing matters, because it tells you what drives the right amount: how unpredictable each of those two things is for each product. ## Why a flat rule fails “Keep two weeks of everything” feels safe and is the most expensive mistake in the book. A steady bestseller with a reliable supplier barely needs a buffer, because little can surprise you. A volatile product with a flaky supplier needs a much bigger one. Apply the same rule to both and you simultaneously under-protect the risky product and over-invest in the safe one. Multiply that across a catalogue and the over-buffering is where a serious amount of cash silently disappears. ## What really decides how much you need Four things, weighed per SKU: - **Demand variability.** How spiky are this product’s sales? Steady demand needs little buffer; lumpy, promotion-driven demand needs more. - **Lead-time variability.** How reliable is the supplier? A supplier who always delivers in 14 days needs far less buffer than one who delivers in anywhere from 14 to 40. - **Service level.** How confident do you want to be that you will not stock out? This is a dial, not a fixed answer, and it has sharply diminishing returns. Going from 90% to 95% confidence is cheap; going from 95% to 99% can cost a lot of extra stock for a small gain. - **Product importance.** Protect your A items, the ones driving revenue, more than your long-tail C items. (See [ABC analysis](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory).) ## Do not skip the cost side Every unit of safety stock is carrying cost and tied-up capital, the same silent drain we covered in [how much cash is trapped on your shelves](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory). The aim is not maximum availability. It is the right availability for each product’s value and volatility. A 99% service level on a cheap, slow C item is money badly spent. The same on a high-margin A item is money well spent. ## A practical way to set it You do not need a statistics degree to do this well. 1. Segment your catalogue by ABC and by how volatile each product is. 2. Set higher buffers on A items, volatile sellers, and long lead-time products. 3. Set minimal buffers on steady, cheap, low-revenue items. 4. Review as velocity and lead times change. Safety stock set once and forgotten drifts out of date the same way a static reorder point does. ## How Stockful helps Doing this by hand across a real catalogue is exactly the kind of per-SKU tuning that does not happen because there is never time. Stockful’s AI threshold suggestions propose a safety stock level for each SKU, alongside lead time, restock-to days, and low-stock threshold, with the reasoning shown so you can sanity-check it before applying. You can tune one SKU in its detail view or many at once in bulk, and those values feed straight into your reorder recommendations and days-of-cover alerts. Safety stock is not about holding more. It is about holding the right buffer in the right places, so you are protected where it counts and not bleeding cash where it does not. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful suggests safety stock per SKU from your real demand variability and lead times, with the reasoning shown._ **More from Stockful:** - Need the formula first? [How to Calculate Safety Stock](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify) - [Why the textbook reorder point formula breaks for DTC brands](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify) - [The true cost of a stockout on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Inventory Planner vs Stockful for Shopify URL: https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read If you are looking for a Shopify inventory app, you have probably come across both Inventory Planner by Sage and Stockful. They are both popular choices, but they solve different problems. Picking the right one depends on what you actually need. Here is an honest comparison of both tools, including where each one is stronger and where the other is a better fit. ## What each tool does **Inventory Planner by Sage** is a demand forecasting and purchase order management tool. Its core job is to predict what you will sell in the future and help you create purchase orders to restock accordingly. It focuses on the planning and buying side of inventory management. **Stockful** is an inventory analytics and reporting tool. Its core job is to give you visibility into how your inventory is performing right now and how it has performed over time. It focuses on the monitoring and analysis side of inventory management. These are complementary functions, not competing ones. Some merchants use both. But if you are choosing one to start with, understanding the difference matters. ## Demand forecasting and purchase orders This is Inventory Planner’s core strength. It uses historical sales data to forecast future demand, calculates how much you need to order, and lets you create and send purchase orders directly from the app. If your primary pain point is knowing what to buy and when to buy it, Inventory Planner is built for that. Stockful takes a different approach. It provides reorder recommendations based on sales velocity and current stock levels, and flags products that need to be restocked. But it does not generate purchase orders or send them to suppliers. It tells you what needs attention; the actual PO creation happens in Shopify’s native purchase order system or your existing workflow. If purchase order automation is your top priority, Inventory Planner has the edge here. ## Inventory analytics and reporting This is Stockful’s core strength. It captures daily inventory snapshots across every Shopify location and provides over 100 built-in reports: low stock, out of stock, overstocked, dead stock, ABC analysis, inventory valuation, reorder recommendations, location comparison, transfer suggestions, sell-through rate, and profit and COGS breakdowns among them. Anything the library does not already cover, you can build yourself. Reports can be scheduled for automatic delivery via email or Slack on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. You can also view any report live in the app and export on demand. Inventory Planner includes reporting as well, with over 200 metrics and detailed SKU-level profitability analysis. Its reports lean more toward purchasing intelligence (what should I buy?) rather than inventory health monitoring (how is my stock performing?). If your primary need is understanding what is happening with your inventory, spotting dead stock, tracking sell-through rates by location, and getting scheduled reports delivered to your team, Stockful is purpose-built for this. ## Data capture and integration Stockful’s monitoring side is read-only. It connects to your Shopify data via webhooks, captures daily snapshots, and analyses what is happening without modifying your stock levels, products, or orders. The only writes are ones you ask for: receiving against a purchase order, and optionally syncing landed cost back to Shopify’s cost per item. That makes it safe to install alongside other tools without worrying about conflicts. Inventory Planner is more deeply integrated into your purchasing workflow. It syncs with Shopify and other platforms (Amazon, BigCommerce, QuickBooks), pulls in data from multiple sources, and can push purchase orders back into your system. This deeper integration is powerful but means there is more setup and more potential for sync issues if something goes wrong. ## Multi-location support Both tools support multiple Shopify locations. Stockful tracks inventory at each location independently, provides side-by-side location comparisons, calculates per-location health scores, and generates transfer suggestions to balance stock across locations. Inventory Planner supports multi-location stock planning and can factor location-level data into its forecasting and replenishment recommendations. ## Historical data Stockful captures daily inventory snapshots and retains up to one year of historical data. This is particularly valuable because Shopify’s native adjustment history only goes back 180 days. Having 12 months of daily data enables year-over-year comparison, seasonal trend analysis, and more accurate forecasting baselines. Inventory Planner stores and analyses past sales data to feed its forecasting models. It can pull historical data from Shopify and factor in seasonality. ## Pricing Stockful offers a free plan that includes core features with no time limit, making it accessible for merchants who want to start with inventory analytics without a financial commitment. Paid plans scale based on the number of tracked SKUs. Inventory Planner does not publish fixed pricing on its app store listing. Pricing is quote-based and adapts to business size. Based on reviews, annual costs can run into the thousands, and the tool is primarily positioned for merchants doing $1M+ in revenue. Some smaller merchants have reported being told their business was too small for the service. ## Which one should you choose? **Choose Inventory Planner if:** Your primary problem is knowing what to order and when. You want automated demand forecasting and purchase order creation within the same tool. You are a larger operation (typically $1M+ revenue) with complex purchasing needs and supplier relationships. **Choose Stockful if:** Your primary problem is lack of visibility into how your inventory is performing. You need reports that Shopify does not provide natively (dead stock, ABC analysis, sell-through rates, inventory trends). You want scheduled, automated reporting via email or Slack. You want to start free and upgrade as your needs grow. **Choose both if:** You want end-to-end coverage. Use Stockful for monitoring, reporting, and alerting. Use Inventory Planner for forecasting and purchasing. The analytics from Stockful can inform the purchasing decisions you execute in Inventory Planner. ## The bottom line Inventory Planner and Stockful are not direct competitors. They focus on different stages of the inventory management lifecycle. Inventory Planner is about planning what to buy. Stockful is about understanding what you have and how it is performing. The right choice depends on your biggest pain point today. If purchase orders across multiple channels are the bottleneck, Inventory Planner is built around that workflow. If you want visibility and forecasting - Stockful now fits five self-tuning models per SKU, learns each product’s seasonality from up to 2 years of history, and tracks its own accuracy - at a flat price, that is what Stockful is built for. See the full breakdown on our [Inventory Planner alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) page, and if you are also weighing Prediko, we compare against it too: [Prediko alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative). _Want to see what Stockful can do for your store? Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app)) with a 14-day free trial._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Inventory Velocity for Shopify Stores | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Most Shopify merchants know their revenue numbers. Fewer know how fast their inventory is turning into that revenue. That speed, how quickly stock moves from your warehouse to your customers, is called inventory velocity. It is one of the most important metrics in inventory management, and one that Shopify does not surface natively. Understanding it can change how you buy, stock, and price your products. ## Inventory velocity, explained simply Inventory velocity (also called inventory turnover) measures how many times you sell through and replace your stock over a given period, usually a year. The basic formula is: **Inventory Velocity = Cost of Goods Sold / Average Inventory** So if your annual COGS is $200,000 and your average inventory value is $50,000, your velocity is 4. That means you sold through and replaced your entire inventory about four times during the year. You can also express this as days of inventory on hand (often called DIO or days of supply): **Days of Inventory = 365 / Inventory Velocity** Using the same example: 365 / 4 = about 91 days. On average, your stock sits for 91 days before it sells. For most ecommerce businesses, a healthy inventory velocity falls between 2 and 6, depending on your product type and price point. Fast-moving consumer goods will be higher. Specialty or luxury items will be lower. ## Why velocity matters more than stock levels Knowing that you have 500 units of a product in stock does not tell you much on its own. But knowing that those 500 units represent 15 days of supply (high velocity) versus 300 days of supply (very low velocity) tells you completely different stories. High velocity means your cash is cycling quickly. You buy inventory, sell it, collect revenue, and reinvest. Low velocity means your money is trapped in unsold goods, accumulating storage costs and risking obsolescence. Here is what velocity reveals at a practical level: **Cash flow health.** Higher velocity means less capital locked up in inventory. You have more cash available for marketing, product development, or simply keeping the business running. **Dead stock risk.** Products with very low velocity are candidates for dead stock. If a product is turning over less than once a year, it is probably not worth restocking. **Reorder timing.** Velocity data combined with supplier lead times gives you precise reorder points. If a product sells 10 units per day and your supplier needs 14 days to deliver, you know to reorder when stock hits 140 units (plus a safety buffer). **Product line decisions.** When evaluating your catalogue, velocity tells you which products are efficient uses of your capital and which are dragging it down. ## How to calculate it for your Shopify store Shopify does not provide an inventory velocity report directly, but you can calculate it with data that is available. **Get your COGS.** If you have cost-per-item set for your products in Shopify, you can calculate COGS from your sales data. Otherwise, you will need to pull cost data from your own records. **Calculate average inventory.** Take your beginning inventory value and ending inventory value for the period, add them together, and divide by two. For more accuracy, use monthly snapshots and average across all months. **Divide COGS by average inventory.** The result is your velocity for the period. The challenge is doing this at the product level rather than just the store level. Store-wide velocity hides the fact that some products are turning over quickly while others are barely moving. You need per-product velocity to make useful decisions. This is where manual calculation becomes impractical for stores with large catalogues. Tools like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) calculate sell-through rates and velocity metrics at the product and variant level across all locations, giving you the per-SKU visibility that Shopify’s native reporting cannot provide. ## How to improve velocity If your velocity is lower than you would like, here are practical levers to pull: **Clear dead and slow-moving stock.** This is the fastest way to improve velocity. Discount, bundle, or liquidate products that are not selling. Every unit of dead stock sitting in your warehouse is pulling your velocity number down. **Tighten your reorder quantities.** Ordering smaller quantities more frequently increases velocity because you carry less stock at any given time. The trade-off is potentially higher shipping costs and more purchasing admin, so find the balance that works for your margins. **Improve demand forecasting.** Better forecasts mean you buy closer to what you will actually sell, reducing the excess that drags velocity down. **Negotiate shorter lead times.** If your supplier can deliver in 7 days instead of 30, you can hold less safety stock and still avoid stockouts. This directly improves velocity. **Adjust your product mix.** If certain products consistently have low velocity, consider whether they deserve shelf space and capital. Replacing slow movers with faster-turning alternatives can lift your overall efficiency. ## The balance: velocity versus availability Velocity is not a metric to maximise blindly. Push too hard for high turnover and you risk stockouts, expedited shipping costs, and lost sales. The goal is to find the right balance between moving inventory quickly and having enough stock to serve your customers reliably. Use velocity alongside other metrics like fill rate (what percentage of orders you can fulfil from available stock) and stockout frequency to get the full picture. ## Start measuring it If you are not tracking inventory velocity today, start with a store-level calculation to get a baseline. Then dig into product-level numbers to find the outliers: the products turning over too slowly (dead stock candidates) and those turning over so fast you might be at risk of stockouts. Velocity gives you a single lens that connects your inventory decisions to your cash flow. Once you start watching it, you will wonder how you managed without it. ## Quick reference: velocity benchmarks by product type These are rough guidelines, not hard rules, but they give you a useful starting point for evaluating your own numbers. Fast-moving consumer goods (health, beauty, supplements) often see velocity of 6-12 turns per year. Fashion and apparel typically falls between 4-6 turns. Electronics and gadgets range from 3-5 turns. Specialty and luxury items may only turn 1-3 times per year. If your velocity is significantly below the benchmark for your category, dig into the product-level data to find out what is dragging it down. Usually it is a small number of slow-moving SKUs pulling the average lower. ## Further reading - [How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify) - [Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide) - [How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) - [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) _Stockful tracks sell-through rates and inventory velocity across your entire Shopify catalogue, broken down by product and location. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*Inventory Turnover and Days of Supply takes the next step into measuring how fast stock actually moves. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Multi-location inventory management for Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/multi-location-shopify-inventory-management [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Managing Inventory Across Multiple Shopify Locations Without Spreadsheets Running multiple Shopify locations? Here's how to track, balance, and report on inventory across warehouses and stores without spreadsheets. 6 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Shopify makes it relatively easy to set up multiple inventory locations. You add a warehouse here, a retail store there, maybe a 3PL. Products get assigned to locations, stock levels get tracked independently, and fulfilment priorities route orders to the right place. That is the easy part. The hard part is actually managing inventory across those locations once they are live. Because while Shopify tracks quantities at each location, it does not give you the tools to compare performance across locations, balance stock distribution, or spot imbalances before they become problems. Most merchants end up doing this in spreadsheets, and most of those spreadsheets eventually become unmanageable. Here is how to manage multi-location inventory properly. ## The spreadsheet trap The typical progression looks like this: you start with one location and everything is simple. You add a second location and start a spreadsheet to track what is where. By the time you have three or four locations, the spreadsheet has become a monster with multiple tabs, manual data entry, and a growing list of formulas that break whenever someone edits the wrong cell. The core problem is that spreadsheets are static. Your inventory changes constantly (sales, returns, transfers, new stock arriving), but your spreadsheet only reflects reality at the moment you last updated it. By the time you have finished entering today’s numbers, they are already wrong. More importantly, spreadsheets can tell you what you have. They are terrible at telling you what you should do about it. ## What multi-location management actually requires Effective multi-location inventory management comes down to answering a few key questions consistently: **Where is my stock right now?** Not just totals, but a breakdown by location, by product, updated in real time or close to it. **Is stock distributed correctly?** If Location A has 200 units of a product and Location B has 3, you have an imbalance. If Location B is selling that product faster, the imbalance is actively costing you money. **Which location is performing best?** Sell-through rates, inventory turns, and days-of-stock metrics should be available per location, not just as a store-wide average. A product might be a top seller at one location and dead stock at another. **When should I transfer stock?** Transfers between locations take time and cost money. You need data to justify them, not guesswork. ## How Shopify handles multi-location (and where it falls short) Shopify does a solid job with the basics. You can see current stock levels at each location from the admin. You can create transfers between locations. Fulfilment priorities determine which location ships first. But the reporting and analytics layer is thin: Shopify’s inventory reports do not let you combine location-level data with metrics like sell-through rate or percentage sold. If you add the location dimension to a report, certain metrics become unavailable. There is no location comparison view. You cannot see how the same product performs at Location A versus Location B without exporting data and building your own comparison. Transfer suggestions do not exist. Shopify will not tell you that Location A has excess stock of a product that Location B is about to run out of. You have to spot that yourself. There is no per-location health score or overstock/understock alerting beyond basic low-stock notifications. ## A better approach Instead of spreadsheets, here is what a practical multi-location workflow looks like: ### 1\. Centralise your inventory view You need a single dashboard that shows stock levels across all locations for every product. Not a spreadsheet you update manually, but a live view that pulls directly from Shopify. This is table stakes. If you cannot see what is where at a glance, every other decision is guesswork. ### 2\. Compare performance across locations Once you can see stock levels, the next step is understanding how stock moves at each location. Sell-through rates, average daily sales, and days-of-stock metrics should be available per location. For example: Product X has 45 days of stock at your warehouse but only 5 days at your retail store. That is a clear signal to transfer stock before the retail location runs out. ### 3\. Get transfer suggestions automatically The best multi-location setup does not just show you the data. It tells you what to do. If one location is overstocked and another is understocked on the same product, you should get a transfer recommendation with quantities. [Stockful](https://stockful.app) does this by analysing stock levels and sell-through rates across your locations and generating specific transfer suggestions to balance inventory distribution. ### 4\. Monitor inventory health by location Not all locations perform the same way. One warehouse might have a dead stock problem while another is lean and efficient. You need visibility into each location’s health: out-of-stock rates, overstock levels, dead stock percentages, and overall inventory turnover. A composite health score per location lets you spot problems quickly. If one location’s health score drops, you can investigate before it affects your overall operation. ### 5\. Automate reporting Manual reporting does not scale across locations. Set up automated reports that run on a schedule (daily, weekly, or monthly) and deliver location-level summaries to your inbox or Slack channel. This keeps everyone on the team informed without anyone having to log in and pull numbers. ## When to add a dedicated tool If you are running two locations with a small catalogue, you might manage with Shopify’s built-in tools and occasional manual checks. The tipping point usually comes when: You have three or more active locations. The number of product-location combinations grows quickly, and manual tracking becomes unreliable. You are spending more than an hour a week on inventory spreadsheets. That time has a real cost, and the data is still stale by the time you finish. You have experienced a stockout at one location while another location had excess stock of the same product. This is the clearest sign that your current system is not working. You cannot answer the question “which location is performing best?” without significant manual effort. ## Stop managing locations in spreadsheets Multi-location inventory is a solvable problem. You do not need an enterprise ERP or a custom data pipeline. You need live visibility into stock at every location, the ability to compare performance, and actionable suggestions for balancing inventory. The spreadsheet got you this far. But if you are growing beyond it, the time to switch is before the next stockout, not after. ## Further reading - [What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) - [The Shopify Inventory Reports You’re Not Getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide) - [Shopify Multi-Location Inventory with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) - [Shopify Inventory Management with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) _Stockful tracks inventory across every Shopify location with daily snapshots, side-by-side comparisons, and automatic transfer suggestions. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*Overselling Across Locations and Channels covers how to stop the same unit selling twice. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? | Stockful Blog URL: https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read Stockouts get all the attention because they are visible. A customer tries to buy, the product is gone, and you feel it. Overstock is the opposite. It is silent. Nothing breaks, no alert fires, and yet a large part of your cash can be sitting on a shelf doing nothing. Every unit you hold is money you cannot spend on ads, new products, or hiring. The question worth asking is not how much inventory you have. It is how much of it is more than you needed, and what that excess is quietly costing you. ## The two ways inventory ties up money, and only one is obvious There are two failure modes. Stockouts cost you sales you could have made. Overstock costs you the use of cash you already spent. The first is loud, the second is silent, and most stores spend far more energy on the loud one. The silent cost is bigger than it looks, because it compounds. Cash locked in slow-moving stock is cash you are not putting to work, in a period where you could be growing. ## What overstock actually costs **Opportunity cost.** This is the main one. Money in excess stock is money not invested in your best opportunities. If you are growing, that trade is expensive. **Carrying cost.** Storage, insurance, handling, and the admin of holding stock. This is commonly estimated at 20% to 30% of the inventory’s value per year, and it climbs the longer stock sits. **Markdown and depreciation risk.** The longer a product waits, the more likely you end up discounting it, and the more it loses value or goes out of season. Today’s overstock is a candidate for tomorrow’s dead stock. It is worth drawing that line clearly. Overstock is stock that still sells, you just have too much of it, or bought it too early. Dead stock is stock that has stopped selling. They need different responses, and we cover the second one in [how to spot dead stock before it is dead](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify). ## How to find your trapped cash The mistake is to look at total inventory value. That tells you what you own, not what you over-own. What you want is the excess: stock beyond what current demand justifies. A practical way to define it is days of cover. If a SKU sells two units a day and you are holding 400, that is 200 days of cover. For most products that is far more than you need, and the units beyond a sensible target are your trapped cash for that SKU. Then apply an ABC lens. Capital tied up in a slow-moving, low-revenue C item is worse than the same value in a fast A item that will sell through quickly. Sorting your excess by where the money actually is tells you where to act first. In Stockful this is the Overstock report read alongside Inventory Valuation and ABC analysis: the report flags SKUs holding far more than their velocity warrants, valuation tells you the cash value, and ABC tells you which excess matters most. A quick worked example: a SKU with 250 units of cover beyond your 60-day target, at a unit cost of $8, is 250 x 8, or $2,000 of cash sitting idle in one product. Repeat that across a catalogue and the total is usually sobering. ## Freeing it up without creating stockouts The goal is not zero inventory. Running too lean just swaps overstock for stockouts, and we have seen what those cost. The goal is cash velocity: the right amount in the right place, moving. - **Right-size your reorders.** Order smaller quantities more often where lead times allow, instead of large batches that sit. - **Transfer before you discount.** If one location is overstocked and another is short, move it rather than marking it down. Often the cheapest fix is [an inventory transfer](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock), not a sale. - **Discount the genuine excess, not your winners.** Targeted promotions on real slow movers free cash. Blanket discounting trains customers to wait and erodes margin on products that would have sold anyway. Overstock will not set off an alarm, so you have to go looking for it. Measure your excess, value it, and the silent cost stops being silent. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful’s overstock, valuation, and ABC reports show you exactly where your cash is sitting still._ **More from Stockful:** - [How to spot dead stock before it is dead](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify) - [The true cost of a stockout on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify) - [How to use ABC analysis to prioritise your Shopify inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026 [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read Black Friday 2026 falls on November 27. Cyber Monday is November 30. That might feel like it is months away, but if you are planning inventory for the biggest sales weekend of the year, the preparation window is already open. Most merchants start thinking about BFCM inventory in September or October. By then, if your suppliers have long lead times, you have already missed the window for some orders. The merchants who execute BFCM well start planning in May or June and work backward from the dates. Here is a practical, month-by-month timeline for getting your Shopify inventory ready. ## Why inventory is the BFCM bottleneck BFCM is primarily a marketing and sales event, but the operational bottleneck is almost always inventory. You can run the best ads in the world, but if your top products stock out on Friday afternoon, you are leaving revenue on the table. The two most common BFCM inventory failures are stocking out of your best sellers (you under-estimated demand and lost sales you cannot recover) and over-ordering for the event and getting stuck with excess inventory in January (you over-estimated demand and now you are running clearance sales to free up cash). Good preparation prevents both. ## May-June: Build your data foundation The first step is understanding what you are working with. **Review last year’s BFCM data.** Pull your sales reports from November-December 2025. Which products sold the most? What was your daily sales rate during the BFCM weekend versus a normal week? Did anything stock out? If so, how early? If you do not have last year’s data because Shopify’s 180-day history has already expired, this is exactly why capturing historical snapshots matters. Tools like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) retain up to a year of daily inventory data, so this year’s BFCM performance will be available for next year’s planning. **Identify your BFCM hero products.** These are the products you will promote most heavily. They should be your best sellers, products with good margin at a discount, or new products you want to push. Build a shortlist of 10-20 hero SKUs that will get the bulk of your marketing spend. **Audit your current inventory health.** Run an ABC analysis and a dead stock report. You want to go into BFCM with a lean, healthy inventory. Clear dead stock now so it does not consume warehouse space you need for BFCM inventory. ## July-August: Place strategic orders This is the critical purchasing window, especially if your suppliers have lead times of 30 days or more. **Calculate BFCM demand estimates.** For your hero products, estimate how much you expect to sell during the BFCM period (typically 5-7 days including the run-up). Use last year’s multiplier: if your normal weekly sales are 100 units and BFCM week was 4x normal, plan for 400 units during the event. Add your safety stock buffer on top. **Place purchase orders early.** Suppliers get busier as BFCM approaches. Placing orders in July or August gives you the best chance of receiving stock on time and may even get you better pricing. Waiting until October means competing with every other retailer for supplier capacity. **Negotiate terms.** If you are placing larger-than-normal orders for BFCM, use the volume as leverage for better pricing, priority shipping, or flexible return terms on unsold inventory. **Consider staggered orders.** Rather than one massive order, place a primary order for your base BFCM estimate and a smaller follow-up order 2-3 weeks later. If early sales data suggests higher demand, you can increase the follow-up. If demand looks softer, you can reduce it. ## September-October: Receive and prepare **Receive and verify inventory.** As BFCM shipments arrive, verify quantities carefully against your purchase orders. Any discrepancies need to be caught now, not during the event. **Distribute stock across locations.** If you have multiple fulfilment locations, allocate BFCM inventory based on each location’s expected demand. Centralising everything in one warehouse creates a single point of failure. Spreading stock across locations also reduces shipping times for customers. **Set up low-stock alerts.** Configure Shopify Flow automations or use your inventory app’s alert system to notify you when hero products hit a predefined threshold during the event. You want to know the moment a product starts running low, not after it sells out. **Prepare your clearance plan.** Decide now what you will do if you have leftover BFCM inventory in December. Having a clearance strategy ready (Boxing Day sale, bundle deals, donation) prevents the “what do we do with all this stock?” panic in January. ## November: Execute and monitor **The week before BFCM:** Do a final inventory count against your plan. Confirm all expected shipments have arrived. Test your low-stock alerts to make sure they fire correctly. **During BFCM:** Monitor inventory levels in real time or near-real time. Your best-selling products can move fast, and you may need to pull back marketing spend on products that are about to sell out (or shift spend to products with plenty of stock). **Immediately after BFCM:** Review what sold, what did not, and how accurate your estimates were. This data is the foundation for next year’s planning. Export and save it somewhere durable, because Shopify’s 180-day history will have lost it by next May. ## The earlier you start, the less it hurts BFCM inventory planning is not glamorous work. It is spreadsheets, supplier emails, and a lot of arithmetic. But the merchants who do it well consistently outperform those who wing it. The single biggest advantage you can give yourself is time. Start your analysis now while the calendar is empty, and work the timeline so that when November arrives, your only job is to monitor and sell. ## Quick checklist: BFCM inventory readiness Here is a condensed version you can pin to your wall: May-June: Review last year’s data. Identify hero products. Clear dead stock. Audit inventory health. July-August: Calculate demand estimates. Place primary purchase orders. Negotiate terms. September: Receive and verify shipments. Distribute across locations. Set up low-stock alerts. October: Final inventory audit. Prepare clearance plan for unsold stock. Brief your team. November 1-26: Final stock verification. Test alerts. Confirm all shipments received. November 27-30 (BFCM): Monitor inventory in real time. Adjust marketing spend based on stock levels. December: Review results. Export and save all data. Execute clearance plan if needed. _Stockful gives you the historical data, ABC analysis, and sell-through rates you need to plan BFCM inventory with confidence. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Why the Textbook Reorder Point Fails for DTC | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands The classic reorder point formula assumes steady demand and fixed lead times. DTC has neither. What goes wrong, and how to set reorder points that hold. 27 Jul 2026 · 4 min read Search for “reorder point” and you will get the same formula on every page: **Reorder point = (average daily sales x lead time in days) + safety stock.** It is not wrong. It is one of the most repeated formulas in inventory management for a reason. The problem is that it was built for a world of steady demand and predictable supply, and direct-to-consumer brands do not live in that world. Used as written, it quietly sets you up to stock out. Here is where it breaks, and what a reorder point that actually holds looks like for a DTC store. ## The three assumptions hiding in the formula The formula is simple because it leans on three assumptions that you never see stated: 1. Demand is steady and predictable, so an average describes it well. 2. Lead time is fixed and reliable, so one number is enough. 3. You will calculate and maintain a reorder point for every SKU by hand, and keep it current. For a factory ordering steel on annual contracts, those mostly hold. For a Shopify brand, all three are shaky. ## Where each one breaks **Demand is not steady.** Promotions, paid campaigns, a creator posting your product, seasonality, a competitor selling out. DTC demand is spiky by nature, and an average flattens every spike into a calm-looking number that does not reflect how the product actually sells. **Lead time is not fixed.** Suppliers slip, freight gets delayed, customs holds a shipment. If you plug in your average lead time, you are implicitly accepting that roughly half the time your stock arrives late, which is exactly when stockouts happen. **You will not maintain it by hand.** With hundreds or thousands of SKUs and demand that shifts month to month, a reorder point you set in January is wrong by March. Static numbers rot, and a catalogue full of rotting numbers is worse than no system at all because you trust it. ## The average trap that makes it self-reinforcing There is a subtler problem worth pulling out, because it creates a loop. If a product stocked out last month, it sold zero units while it was unavailable. Those zero-sales days drag down its average daily sales. A lower average produces a lower reorder point. A lower reorder point means you reorder later next time, so you stock out again. The formula uses the symptom of last month’s stockout to plan for next month, and quietly guarantees a repeat. Breaking the loop requires velocity that is aware of out-of-stock periods and estimates true demand, not just the demand that happened to survive while the product was available. ## What a reorder point that holds looks like for DTC The fix is not to abandon the idea of a reorder point. It is to stop treating it as a fixed number you set once. - **Per SKU, recalculated continuously** from recent velocity, so it tracks reality instead of a January snapshot. - **Built on true demand,** with stockout-aware velocity so past stockouts do not understate how fast a product really sells. - **Lead times from your actual supplier history,** including how variable they are, rather than a hopeful single figure. - **Buffers that scale with volatility,** more for spiky or critical products, less for steady ones. (That is the [safety stock](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify) half of the equation.) - **Expressed as days of cover,** so the trigger auto-scales with each SKU’s velocity instead of being a flat unit count. (See days of cover explained.) ## How Stockful handles it This is the job Stockful’s reorder recommendations are built for. They are calculated per SKU from your Shopify sales history, using stockout-aware velocity and your real lead times, and they update as the data changes rather than waiting for you to revisit a spreadsheet. Its AI threshold suggestions go further, proposing tuned lead time, safety stock, and restock-to values per SKU with the reasoning shown, so you can see why before you apply anything. The textbook formula is a fine starting point. The mistake is freezing it. Treat the reorder point as a living number that tracks your real demand and supply, and it stops working against you. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful calculates reorder points per SKU from your real sales history and lead times, and keeps them current._ **More from Stockful:** - Start with the basics: [How to Set Reorder Points That Work](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores) - [How much safety stock is enough?](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify) - [The true cost of a stockout on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How to Set Reorder Points on Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read A reorder point is the inventory level at which you should place a new order with your supplier. Get it right and stock arrives just before you run out. Get it wrong and you either stock out (ordered too late) or carry excess inventory for weeks (ordered too early). Shopify lets you set low-stock alerts, but those are just notifications. They do not tell you what the threshold should be, how to calculate it, or whether the number makes sense for each product. Setting a reorder point requires combining your sales velocity, lead time, and safety stock into a single number. Here is how to do it. ## The reorder point formula The formula is straightforward: **Reorder Point = (Average Daily Sales x Lead Time in Days) + Safety Stock** The first part (average daily sales x lead time) tells you how much stock you will sell while waiting for your next order to arrive. The safety stock buffer protects against demand spikes and delivery delays. Worked example: you sell an average of 15 units per day. Your supplier takes 12 days to deliver. You carry 50 units of safety stock. Reorder Point = (15 x 12) + 50 = 180 + 50 = 230 units When your stock level for that product drops to 230 units, it is time to place an order. If everything goes to plan, your new shipment arrives right as you are dipping into your safety stock buffer. If demand spikes or the supplier is late, your safety stock covers the gap. ## Getting the inputs right The formula is simple. Getting accurate inputs is the hard part. **Average daily sales.** Pull sales data for each product over the last 60-90 days. Divide total units sold by the number of days. Watch out for stockout periods: if a product was unavailable for 10 of those 90 days, divide by 80 instead of 90 to avoid underestimating demand. **Lead time.** This is not just your supplier’s stated delivery time. It includes the time from when you decide to order to when stock is available to sell: order processing time + manufacturing time (if applicable) + shipping time + receiving and shelving time. Track actuals, not promises. If your supplier says 10 days but it is consistently 14, use 14. **Safety stock.** See our separate guide on calculating safety stock. For a quick estimate: use 20-30% of your lead time demand as a starting buffer. So if your lead time demand is 180 units, safety stock of 36-54 units is a reasonable starting point. ## Why Shopify’s low-stock alerts fall short Shopify lets you create a Shopify Flow automation that triggers when inventory drops below a threshold. This is useful, but it has limitations: The threshold is a single static number. It does not adapt to changes in your sales velocity or lead time. A reorder point of 100 units might have been right six months ago, but if your sales have doubled, you are now stocking out before your alert even fires. Alerts are binary: above or below. There is no intelligence behind them. They do not tell you how much to order, when the order should arrive, or whether the current level is concerning or just normal fluctuation. There is no per-location logic. If you have multiple locations, your reorder point should be different at each one based on local demand. A global threshold does not account for this. ## Setting reorder points at scale For stores with a handful of products, you can calculate reorder points in a spreadsheet and manually set Shopify Flow alerts. For larger catalogues, this does not scale. Here is a practical approach for stores with 50+ SKUs: **Tier your products.** Use ABC analysis to identify your A items (top revenue drivers). Calculate precise reorder points for these first. They deserve the most attention because a stockout on an A item costs the most. **Use reasonable defaults for the rest.** For B and C items, use a simplified calculation: average daily sales x lead time x 1.25 (the 1.25 provides a rough 25% safety buffer). This is not perfect but it is dramatically better than guessing. **Review quarterly.** Reorder points are not set-and-forget. Sales patterns shift seasonally, suppliers change their lead times, and new products can cannibalise demand from existing ones. Recalculate at least every quarter. **Automate where possible.** Inventory tools like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) generate reorder recommendations based on your actual sales velocity and stock levels, updated continuously rather than quarterly. This replaces the manual calculation with a live signal that adapts to your business. ## Reorder points for multiple locations If you sell from multiple locations, each location needs its own reorder point for each product. A warehouse that ships nationally will have different demand patterns than a retail store that serves local customers. Calculate reorder points per location using location-specific sales data. If Location A sells 20 units per day and Location B sells 5, their reorder points should reflect that. A single store-wide reorder point will either over-stock one location or under-stock the other. Also consider whether you replenish locations from a central warehouse or order directly from suppliers for each. The lead time for a warehouse-to-store transfer is usually shorter than supplier-to-store, which means the reorder point at the store level can be lower. ## When to adjust reorder points Beyond quarterly reviews, there are specific triggers that should prompt an immediate recalculation: A product’s sales rate changes significantly (up or down). Your supplier changes their lead time or shipping method. You add or remove a fulfilment location. You are heading into a known demand period (holiday season, a major sale). You receive customer feedback suggesting demand is shifting. ## Stop guessing, start calculating The reorder point formula takes five minutes to apply to a single product. The payoff is eliminating the guesswork that leads to stockouts and overstock. Start with your top 10 products, set proper reorder points, and compare the results to your current ad hoc approach. The difference is usually immediate and measurable. _Stockful’s reorder report shows you exactly which products need to be reordered and when, based on your real sales velocity and stock levels. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*[Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify) covers where the standard formula falls down for fast-moving brands. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read There are two halves to restocking. The first is working out what to order: which SKUs, how many, and when. The second is getting that decision onto an actual purchase order your supplier can act on. Most tools help with the first half and leave you to do the second by hand - reading numbers off one screen and retyping them into another. That retyping is where mistakes creep in: a transposed quantity, a wrong unit cost, a SKU matched to the wrong variant. It’s also just slow, especially on a big order. ## Both halves, in one place Stockful’s first half is the decision, done properly: it works out what to reorder from your sales history, [out-of-stock-aware velocity](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) and lead times, so the order starts from real numbers rather than a hunch. The second half is now built in. Purchase orders live in Stockful - created, sent, received and costed in the app, alongside the numbers that justified them. ## From a list to a draft order On the reorder recommendations page you pick what to order - a single item, or bulk-select a batch. Those lines group automatically into one draft purchase order per supplier, so a twenty-line recommendation across four suppliers becomes four orders rather than one afternoon of sorting. Each line is priced from that supplier’s price list, which holds the things that actually determine an order: supplier SKU, cost, pack size, minimum order quantity, lead time, and the supplier’s minimum order value. Nothing gets retyped, and the quantities respect the constraints your supplier actually imposes. You can also start an order from scratch when the trigger isn’t a recommendation - a seasonal buy, a new line, a supplier deal. ## Sending it Once the lines are right, send it the way your supplier expects: export a branded PDF, print packing slips, or email the order straight to them from Stockful. If you buy abroad, the order can be placed in the supplier’s currency. ## Receiving it, honestly Deliveries rarely arrive in one clean piece, so receiving isn’t a single button. You can log shipments as in transit, accept or reject what turns up, take partial receipts against the order, and close it when it’s genuinely complete. Orders can be cancelled, duplicated or archived, and you can track payments and tags against them. ## The part most tools skip: what it really cost A purchase order tells you what you agreed to pay. It doesn’t tell you what the stock actually cost you once it landed - and that gap is where margins quietly go wrong. Add shipping, duties and fees to the order and Stockful allocates them across the units, so each item carries its real cost. That figure feeds your average cost and your margin reporting, and it can optionally sync back to Shopify’s cost per item so both systems agree. It all works alongside Shopify inventory and Shopify POS, so received stock and costs land where the rest of your operation already runs. ## The point of a recommendation A reorder recommendation is only worth anything if acting on it is easy. If turning it into a real order means half an hour of careful retyping, the good numbers get watered down by manual error - or the order gets put off. Keeping the decision, the order, the receipt and the true cost in one place keeps it a single, quick step. You can see the full flow on the [Shopify purchase orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) page, and it’s included on every plan - the same reorder recommendations, suppliers and purchase orders whether you’re on Starter or Pro. Coming from Stocky? Your suppliers, price lists and purchase-order history can come with you - see the [Stocky migration tool](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration), which has to run before Stocky’s API shuts down on 31 August 2026. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_ with a 14-day free trial. Stockful works out what to reorder, then builds, sends and costs the order._ **More from Stockful:** - [Shopify purchase orders, built into Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) - [Migrate from Stocky to Stockful](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) - [How to set reorder points that actually work](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores) - [Replacing Stocky’s replenishment and transfers on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify) - [Demand forecasting for Shopify that learns every product](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Replace Stocky's Replenishment & Transfers | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read If you ran replenishment through Stocky, you lost part of that workflow a while ago and may not have fully replaced it. Shopify removed inventory transfers and min/max forecasting from Stocky back in July 2025, well before the full shutdown. Plenty of merchants have been limping along on spreadsheets and manual reorder decisions ever since. With Stocky closing entirely on 31 August 2026, now is the time to rebuild these two workflows properly: deciding what to reorder, and moving stock between locations. Here is how to put both back together on Shopify. For the broader migration picture, see [what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now). This post focuses specifically on replenishment and transfers. ## What Stocky actually did for you It helps to be precise about what you are replacing, because replenishment covers two different jobs. The first job is deciding when and how much to reorder. Stocky’s min/max and forecasting tried to answer this: it watched your sales, applied a reorder point, and flagged what to buy. The second job is moving stock you already own between locations, so a busy store does not run dry while a quiet one sits on surplus. Stocky bundled both. When Shopify stripped them out in 2025, it left a hole on both sides: no reorder guidance, and no transfer suggestions. ## What Shopify’s native tools cover, and what they do not Shopify has absorbed a lot into the admin. You can now create purchase orders, receive against them, and create [inventory transfers](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/inventory/inventory-transfers) between locations natively. For the execution side of both workflows, the native tools are genuinely fine. The gap is the decision. Shopify’s admin will happily execute a transfer once you tell it what to move, and it will record a purchase order once you decide what to buy. What it will not do is tell you what to reorder, how much, or which stock to move where. There is no demand forecasting, no reorder point, and no transfer suggestion in the native tools. You are back to working that out yourself. That is the part Stocky used to do, and the part you need to replace. ## Rebuilding the reorder workflow A reorder decision needs three inputs: how fast each product sells, how long your supplier takes to deliver, and how much buffer you want to hold. Done by hand across a few hundred SKUs, this is the spreadsheet grind that eats an afternoon every week. To rebuild it properly you want a tool that calculates a reorder point per SKU from your real sales velocity and lead times, then surfaces a ranked list of what to buy. [Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) does this with reorder recommendations built on your Shopify sales history, using velocity that accounts for past stockouts so a product that sold out is not mistaken for a slow mover. The output is a list specific enough to turn into a purchase order. The point is not the specific tool. It is that the decision layer has to come from somewhere, because Shopify’s native admin does not provide it. ## Rebuilding the transfer workflow Transfers are the half people forget, because a single-location store does not need them. If you run more than one location, though, transfers are often the cheapest inventory win you have: moving existing stock to where it will sell, instead of buying more. Here the decision layer matters just as much. You need something that compares stock and demand across your locations and tells you which units to move. Stockful’s transfer suggestions do exactly that, and now create the transfer directly in Shopify as a draft for you to ship when ready. We covered how that works in detail in [actionable transfers and incoming stock](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock). The short version: the tool decides what to move, Shopify handles the shipping. ## Run it in parallel before August Whatever you choose, set it up now and run it alongside what you are doing today, while Stocky’s remnants still exist and before the August deadline. Compare the reorder suggestions against your own judgement for a few weeks. Make sure the velocity and lead times look right for your catalogue. It is far easier to build trust in a new reorder workflow when you can sanity-check it against reality than to switch cold on 31 August. Replenishment and transfers are the two workflows most likely to fall through the cracks when [moving off Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative), precisely because Shopify quietly removed them a year early. Rebuild the decision layer for both, lean on Shopify’s native admin for execution, and you will come out of the shutdown with a stronger setup than Stocky gave you. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_._ **More from Stockful:** - [Your Stocky export checklist before 31 August 2026](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown) - [Move stock instead of reordering it: actionable transfers and incoming stock](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock) - [Stocky vs Shopify native vs a dedicated app: what actually gets replaced](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app) - [Stockful vs Stockie: which Stocky replacement fits?](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Shopify sell-through rate: formula and benchmarks | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Sell-Through Rate Explained: The Shopify Metric You're Probably Ignoring Sell-through rate shows how fast your inventory turns into sales. Here's how to calculate it, what good looks like, and why it matters. 4 May 2026 · 6 min read If you had to pick one number that reveals how healthy your inventory is, sell-through rate would be a strong candidate. Sell-through rate (STR) measures the percentage of your inventory that you sold during a given period. It is a simple ratio, but it answers one of the most important questions in retail: am I actually selling what I bought? Shopify includes a basic version of this metric in its “Percentage of inventory sold” report, but most merchants either do not look at it or do not understand how to use it. That is a missed opportunity. ## What sell-through rate is The formula is: **Sell-Through Rate = (Units Sold / Units Available at Start of Period) x 100** If you started the month with 500 units of a product and sold 150, your sell-through rate is 30%. A high STR means you are moving inventory efficiently. A low STR means stock is sitting. The metric is most useful when tracked over consistent periods (weekly, monthly) and compared across products. ## What good sell-through looks like Benchmarks vary by product type and industry, but some general guidelines: **Above 80% monthly** is excellent. You are selling through most of what you stock. The risk here is actually too high: you may be frequently stocking out and losing potential sales. If your STR is this high, you probably need more inventory. **40-80% monthly** is healthy for most product categories. You are moving stock at a reasonable pace without excessive overstock. **Below 40% monthly** is a warning sign. You have more stock than demand justifies. Some of this inventory may be heading toward dead stock territory. **Below 20% monthly** is a problem. Either you dramatically over-ordered, demand has dropped, or the product is not connecting with customers. Action is needed: discounts, bundles, or discontinuation. Remember that these are monthly benchmarks. Seasonal products will have wildly different STRs depending on the time of year. A winter coat with a 10% STR in July is not necessarily a problem. ## Why STR matters more than raw sales numbers Raw sales numbers tell you what sold. Sell-through rate tells you how efficient your inventory investment was. Consider two products: Product A sold 1,000 units last month from an opening stock of 1,200. STR: 83%. Product B also sold 1,000 units last month, but from an opening stock of 5,000. STR: 20%. Both had identical unit sales, but Product B has 4,000 units of excess inventory consuming warehouse space and cash. STR makes this visible in a way that raw sales figures do not. STR also helps with purchasing decisions. If a product consistently shows 90%+ sell-through, you are probably under-ordering and should increase your next purchase quantity. If it consistently shows 25% sell-through, you are over-ordering and should cut back. ## How to calculate STR in Shopify Shopify’s “Percentage of inventory sold” report does something similar to STR but has some quirks. It uses the starting quantity for the selected period and shows what percentage was sold. Restocking during the period can produce odd numbers (over 100% sell-through if you restocked and sold through the restock). For a cleaner calculation: **Step 1:** Note your beginning inventory for each product at the start of the period (export the inventory list on the first day of the month). **Step 2:** At the end of the period, pull your sales data for units sold by product. **Step 3:** Divide units sold by beginning inventory and multiply by 100. If you restocked during the period, you have two choices: use only the beginning inventory as your denominator (simplest), or add the restocked units to the denominator (more accurate but more complex). For ongoing tracking without manual exports, [Stockful](https://stockful.app) calculates sell-through rates automatically at the product and location level, using the daily inventory snapshots it captures. ## How to use STR in practice **Identify under-performers before they become dead stock.** Any product with a sell-through rate below 20% for two consecutive months deserves investigation. Is it priced too high? Is it not getting visibility on your site? Is demand simply gone? **Validate purchasing decisions.** After you receive a new shipment, track the sell-through rate over the next 30-60 days. If it is lower than expected, adjust your next order quantity downward. **Compare products within categories.** If you sell 20 different t-shirt designs, STR tells you which designs are resonating and which are not. Double down on the winners and phase out the losers. **Measure promotional effectiveness.** Run a sale on a slow-moving product and watch how STR changes. If a 20% discount moves STR from 15% to 60%, the promotion worked. If it barely moves, the product has a deeper problem than pricing. **Track seasonal patterns.** By measuring STR monthly for a full year, you build a picture of when each product peaks and valleys. This is invaluable for planning next year’s purchasing. ## STR and your other inventory metrics Sell-through rate works best alongside a few other metrics: **ABC analysis** tells you which products matter most. STR tells you how efficiently you are stocking them. **Inventory velocity (turnover)** gives you the annual view. STR gives you the granular period-by-period view. **Days of supply** tells you how long current stock will last at the current sales rate. STR tells you what percentage of stock moved in a past period. Together, these metrics give you a complete picture of inventory health. Individually, each one tells only part of the story. ## Start tracking it this week If you are not measuring sell-through rate today, start with a simple monthly calculation for your top 20 products. You will almost certainly discover products you are over-stocking and products you are under-stocking. That discovery alone is worth the ten minutes it takes to set up the calculation. ## A note on restocking and STR accuracy One nuance that trips merchants up: restocking during the measurement period skews the numbers. If you started the month with 200 units, received 300 more mid-month, and sold 350, your STR calculation depends on how you define “units available.” The simplest approach is to use beginning inventory only. Your STR would be 350/200 = 175%, which tells you that you sold more than your starting stock (good velocity, but hard to compare against other products). A more useful approach is to use beginning inventory plus any units received: 350/500 = 70%. This gives you a cleaner picture of how much of all available stock moved. Pick one method and use it consistently. The trend over time matters more than the absolute number. _Stockful calculates sell-through rates automatically for every product and location in your Shopify store. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*[What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify) digs into how to read the number, and the figure most stores get wrong. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Shopify inventory history: older than 180 days | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days of History Isn't Enough Shopify only keeps 180 days of inventory adjustment history. Here's why that's a problem and what you can do about it. 20 Apr 2026 · 6 min read If you go into your Shopify admin and look at inventory adjustment history for any product, you will find data going back roughly 180 days. Anything older than that is gone. Shopify does not retain it. For merchants who only need to know current stock levels, this does not matter. But for anyone trying to understand inventory trends, plan seasonal purchasing, or make data-driven stocking decisions, six months of history is a serious limitation. Here is why the 180-day cap matters and what you can do about it. ## What Shopify actually tracks Shopify’s inventory system is primarily designed to answer one question: how much stock do I have right now? It does this well. You can see current quantities by location, track adjustments with reason codes, and view a log of every stock change. Shopify also offers a few reporting views: month-end snapshots, daily units sold, and percentage-of-inventory-sold reports. But the underlying adjustment history, the detailed record of every increase, decrease, and reason behind it, only goes back 180 days. After that window, the data is no longer accessible through the admin or API. Shopify’s month-end snapshot report has a somewhat longer retention (up to three years for adjusted or ordered variants), but it captures only the ending quantity at the close of each month. It does not show daily trends, velocity changes, or the kind of granular movement data that inventory planning requires. ## Why 180 days is not enough ### You cannot see year-over-year patterns If you sell products with seasonal demand (and most retailers do to some degree), you need at least 12 months of data to compare performance across seasons. With only 180 days, you cannot answer questions like: How did this product sell last November compared to this November? Is demand for this category growing year-over-year, or shrinking? Without year-over-year comparison, seasonal purchasing becomes guesswork. You end up either over-ordering because you are nervous about last year’s stockout, or under-ordering because you do not remember how strong demand was. ### Demand forecasting requires longer baselines Forecasting accuracy improves with more historical data. A forecast based on six months of sales will miss annual patterns entirely. If you launched a product nine months ago, Shopify has already lost the first three months of its sales history. For products with irregular or cyclical demand, you need at least a year (ideally more) of daily data to build a forecast that accounts for peaks, valleys, and long-term trends. ### Trend analysis becomes impossible Is a product’s velocity increasing, decreasing, or flat? Over a six-month window, it is hard to tell whether a change is a genuine trend or just noise. Twelve months of data lets you separate real shifts in demand from short-term fluctuations. ### Audit and compliance gaps Some businesses need inventory records for accounting, tax, or compliance purposes that extend beyond six months. If Shopify is your only source of inventory data, you have a gap. ## What this means in practice Let’s say it is October 2026 and you are planning your purchasing for the holiday season. You want to know how your products sold last November and December to plan your inventory buys. But Shopify’s adjustment history only goes back to roughly April 2026. Last year’s holiday data is gone. You are left relying on memory, old spreadsheets (if you kept them), or the month-end snapshot report (which only gives you ending quantities, not sales velocity or daily trends). This is not a hypothetical problem. It is something merchants deal with every year. The same cliff is coming for Stocky users: when Stocky leaves Shopify on 31 August 2026, its history and reports go with it, so preserving your data is worth solving as part of choosing a [Stocky alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative). ## How to work around the limitation ### Option 1: Export data regularly The simplest approach is to set a recurring reminder to export your inventory data from Shopify before it falls off the 180-day cliff. Export monthly, save the files somewhere organised, and you will have your own historical archive. The downside is that this is manual, easy to forget, and the raw export data requires significant cleanup and analysis to be useful. You also lose the ability to query or visualise the data easily. ### Option 2: Use Shopify’s API to archive data If you have development resources, you can set up an automated process that pulls inventory data from Shopify’s API and stores it in your own database. This gives you full control over retention and lets you build custom reports. The downside is the upfront effort and ongoing maintenance. For most merchants, this is overkill. ### Option 3: Use an app that captures daily snapshots This is the most practical solution for most Shopify merchants. Apps like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) capture daily inventory snapshots at every location, independently of Shopify’s 180-day limitation. This gives you up to a year of daily data, including stock levels, sales velocity, and trend information that you can use for reporting, forecasting, and year-over-year comparison. The app runs in the background, captures the data automatically, and makes it available through built-in reports and alerts. No manual exports, no custom development. ## The broader data problem The 180-day limitation is part of a larger issue with Shopify’s approach to inventory data. Shopify is optimised for selling, not for inventory analytics. It tracks current state well (what you have right now) but does not invest heavily in historical analysis (how things have changed over time). This is not necessarily a criticism. Shopify serves millions of merchants with wildly different needs, and keeping the platform fast and simple requires trade-offs on data retention. But it does mean that merchants who need deeper inventory intelligence have to look outside the native tools. ## What to do right now If you do not have a system in place for capturing inventory data beyond Shopify’s 180-day window, the best time to start is today. Every day you wait is another day of historical data you will not be able to recover later. At minimum, set up a monthly export routine. Better yet, install a tool that automates daily snapshots so you start building a proper historical baseline. Six months from now, when you are planning next season’s purchases, you will be glad you did. ## Further reading - [Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide) - [The Shopify Inventory Reports You’re Not Getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) - [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) _Stockful captures daily inventory snapshots across every Shopify location, giving you up to a year of historical data for trend analysis, forecasting, and reporting. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How to Run Shopify Cycle Counts | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-cycle-counts-inventory [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Shopify Inventory Counts: How to Run Cycle Counts Without Shutting Down Full inventory counts disrupt your operation. Cycle counting is faster, less painful, and keeps your stock accurate year-round. Here's how. 14 May 2026 · 5 min read If you have ever done a full physical inventory count, you know the pain. Close the store (or pause fulfilment), count every single item, reconcile the numbers, fix the discrepancies, and lose a day of productivity. It is disruptive, exhausting, and something most merchants avoid until they absolutely have to. Cycle counting is the alternative. Instead of counting everything at once, you count a small portion of your inventory on a rotating schedule. Over time, every product gets counted, but you never have to shut down your operation. Here is how to set up cycle counting for your Shopify store. ## Why your inventory counts are probably wrong Even if you track inventory carefully in Shopify, discrepancies creep in. Products get damaged and discarded without updating the system. Returns get restocked but the quantity does not get adjusted. Items get mis-picked during fulfilment. Theft happens. Data entry errors happen. The longer you go without verifying physical stock against your Shopify numbers, the wider the gap grows. And that gap has real consequences: overselling products you do not actually have, under-ordering because Shopify shows more stock than you actually have, and inaccurate financial reporting. Industry benchmarks suggest that only a minority of businesses maintain inventory accuracy above 95%. The rest are making decisions based on numbers that are at least partially wrong. ## What cycle counting is Cycle counting is a systematic approach where you count a subset of your inventory on a regular schedule (daily, weekly, or biweekly) rather than counting everything at once. The key principle: count different products each time, rotating through your entire catalogue over a defined period (typically one quarter or one year). By the time you have completed the cycle, every product has been counted at least once. The advantages over full counts are significant. There is no operational shutdown required. You can count during normal business hours. Discrepancies are caught sooner (a product counted monthly gets corrected 12 times a year instead of once). The workload is spread out rather than concentrated into one miserable weekend. ## How to set up cycle counting on Shopify ### Step 1: Decide on a counting frequency by product tier Not every product needs to be counted with the same frequency. Use your ABC analysis to prioritise: **A items (top 20% by revenue):** Count monthly. These are your most important products. A discrepancy on an A item has the biggest financial impact. **B items (middle tier):** Count quarterly. Still important, but a slightly longer interval is acceptable. **C items (bottom tier):** Count every six months or annually. These products contribute little revenue, so the cost of counting them frequently outweighs the benefit. This tiered approach means you count your most valuable inventory far more often than your least valuable, which is a much better use of time than treating every product equally. ### Step 2: Create a counting schedule Divide your A items into roughly equal groups, one for each week of the month. Each week, count one group of A items. Every month, add a batch of B items to the weekly count. Every quarter, add a batch of C items. For a store with 500 SKUs where 100 are A items, 150 are B, and 250 are C, a schedule might look like: Week 1: 25 A items + 12-13 B items Week 2: 25 A items + 12-13 B items Week 3: 25 A items + 12-13 B items Week 4: 25 A items + 12-13 B items + a batch of C items That is roughly 40 products per week, which is manageable for most teams in 1-2 hours. ### Step 3: Count and reconcile For each product on the week’s list, physically count the stock at each location and compare it to what Shopify shows. If the numbers match, move on. If they do not, investigate: Is the discrepancy small (1-2 units)? It is likely a mis-pick, unrecorded damage, or a return processing error. Adjust the inventory in Shopify with an appropriate reason code. Is the discrepancy large? Something systemic is going on. Check recent orders, returns, and transfers for that product. Look for patterns. A consistent negative discrepancy might indicate theft, incorrect receiving, or a fulfilment error that is happening repeatedly. ### Step 4: Adjust inventory in Shopify When you find a discrepancy, update the stock level in Shopify immediately. Use the inventory adjustment feature with a reason (like “count” or “damage”) so you have an audit trail. Shopify’s adjustment history will record the change with a timestamp and reason code. This is valuable for tracking whether your accuracy is improving over time. ### Step 5: Track accuracy metrics After each counting session, record the results: how many products were counted, how many had discrepancies, and what the average discrepancy size was. Your goal is to improve accuracy over time. If 30% of your A items have discrepancies in the first month, that number should be declining as you identify and fix the root causes. ## Tips for efficient cycle counting **Count at quiet times.** If possible, count before the store opens or during low-traffic hours. Counting while orders are being picked creates confusion. **Use barcode scanning.** If you have a barcode scanner (Shopify POS supports them), scanning is faster and more accurate than manual lookups. **Assign ownership.** Make one person responsible for the counting schedule. If it is “everyone’s job,” it becomes nobody’s job. **Do not adjust and investigate at the same time.** If you find a large discrepancy, record it, adjust the quantity in Shopify to match reality, and investigate the cause separately. Do not hold up the count trying to figure out why. **Keep it consistent.** The value of cycle counting comes from regularity. A count that happens every week catches problems early. A count that happens “whenever we get around to it” is barely better than not counting at all. ## Cycle counting and your inventory tools Cycle counting is a manual process by nature (you have to physically count things), but your inventory analytics tools can make it smarter. [Stockful](https://stockful.app) provides daily inventory snapshots and tracks stock movements over time. If you notice a sudden drop in stock levels for a product without a corresponding increase in sales, that is a signal to prioritise it for your next cycle count. Combining automated analytics with regular physical verification gives you the most reliable inventory data possible. _Stockful’s daily inventory snapshots help you spot discrepancies before they become problems, so your cycle counts stay focused on what matters. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude or ChatGPT URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor Stockful's MCP server connects your inventory to the AI tools you already use. Ask about stock, forecasts and margins, and act with confirmation. 8 Jun 2026 · 4 min read You probably already have an AI assistant you trust. Maybe it is Claude, maybe it is ChatGPT, maybe it is Cursor or VS Code while you are building something. You use it every day. The one thing it has never been able to do is see your actual inventory. Most inventory apps that add AI keep it locked inside their own interface. You get a chat box in their dashboard, and that is where the intelligence stays. Stockful has an in-app assistant too, and it is genuinely useful. But your inventory data should not be trapped in a single window. Stockful now runs a remote MCP server. In one step you can connect your inventory data to the AI tools you already use, and ask about your stock, forecasts, margins, and anomalies in the same place you do the rest of your work. ## What an MCP server is, briefly MCP stands for Model Context Protocol. It is an open standard for connecting AI assistants to outside tools and data sources in a controlled way. Think of it as a universal adapter. Instead of every app building a bespoke integration for every AI tool, an app exposes one MCP server, and any tool that speaks MCP can connect to it. A growing list of tools support it, including the Claude desktop app, Claude Code, Cursor, VS Code, the Gemini CLI, and ChatGPT. Stockful’s server is remote, which means there is nothing to install or host. You connect to it over a single URL. ## Ask about your inventory from your own AI tool Once connected, your AI tool can read your real Stockful data. That covers: - Current inventory levels across your locations - Demand forecasts and reorder timing - Stock value and margins - ABC ranking, so you can see which SKUs actually drive revenue - Lost sales from stockouts - AI-detected demand anomalies, the unusual spikes and drops Stockful flags automatically Because this runs inside the tool you already use, you can fold inventory into whatever you were already doing. Ask Claude to draft a supplier email and pull the reorder quantities from Stockful in the same conversation. Ask ChatGPT to summarise the week’s anomalies before your Monday planning. The inventory data sits alongside everything else rather than in a separate tab you have to remember to open. ## Take action, with a confirmation step The connection is not limited to reading. You can also make changes through it, with a confirmation before anything actually happens. Through your AI tool you can: - Snooze reorder recommendations - Dismiss transfer suggestions - Toggle alerts and scheduled reports on or off - Adjust forecast settings Each write action asks for confirmation first. The assistant proposes, you approve. Nothing changes in your store on the assistant’s say-so alone. ## Setup: one URL, no keys to manage Connecting is deliberately simple. In Stockful, go to Settings, then MCP server. Create a connection, give it a name so you can recognise it later, and copy the single URL it generates. Paste that URL into your AI tool’s connector settings. There are no API keys to generate and no headers to configure. You create one connection per tool, which keeps things tidy and easy to manage. Full setup steps are in the [MCP server documentation](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/mcp-server). ## Built with the right boundaries Letting an AI tool reach into your business data needs clear limits. Here is how each connection is scoped: - **Read-only or confirmed-write.** A connection either reads your data, or for the write actions above, asks for confirmation before it changes anything. - **Scoped to your store.** A connection only ever sees your shop’s data. - **Attributed.** Each connection is tied to whoever created it, so you have a record of who connected what. - **Revocable any time.** If you no longer want a tool connected, revoke the connection and access stops immediately. As with the rest of Stockful’s AI features, your shop data is sent to AI models for inference only. It is not used to train models. ## How this fits with the in-app assistant Stockful already has an AI assistant built into the app, so why also expose an MCP server? Because they suit different moments. The in-app assistant is there when you are working inside Stockful and want answers without leaving your reports. The MCP server is for when you are working somewhere else, in Claude, ChatGPT, or your editor, and you want your inventory to come to you. Same underlying data, two ways in. You do not have to choose one. ## Getting started Three steps to your first answer: 1. In Stockful, open Settings, then MCP server, and create a connection. 2. Copy the URL and paste it into your AI tool’s connector settings. 3. Ask it something real, like “what should I reorder this week?” and check that the answer references your actual variants and quantities. Your inventory data has always held the answers. Now you can ask for them without changing tools. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Explore the full AI feature set at _[_stockful.app/ai_](https://stockful.app/ai)_._ **More from Stockful:** - [Stockful AI: an inventory assistant that actually knows your Shopify store](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify) - [Move stock instead of reordering it: actionable transfers and incoming stock](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock) - [Why Shopify inventory management needs more than native tools](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # The 6 inventory reports Shopify doesn't give you | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # The Shopify Inventory Reports You're Not Getting (and How to Fix It) Shopify's built-in inventory reports have major gaps. Here are the reports you're missing and how to get the data you actually need. 2 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Shopify gives you a few inventory reports out of the box: a month-end snapshot, daily units sold, and a percentage-of-inventory-sold view. For a store with a small catalogue and one location, these might be enough. But if you are managing hundreds of SKUs, multiple locations, or trying to make real purchasing decisions based on data, Shopify’s native reporting has some significant blind spots. Here are the reports most Shopify merchants need but are not getting, and what you can do about it. ## What Shopify actually gives you Before diving into the gaps, it helps to understand what the built-in reports actually cover. **Month-end inventory snapshot.** This shows how many units of each variant you had at the end of each month. It is useful for a broad view but only captures a single data point per month. You cannot see what happened day-to-day within that month. **Average inventory sold per day.** This report tells you the average daily units sold per product variant. Decent for identifying your fastest-moving items, but it does not account for days when you were out of stock (which artificially lowers the average). **Percentage of inventory sold.** This shows sell-through as a percentage of starting inventory. Helpful in theory, but it can produce misleading numbers if you restocked during the period. **Inventory adjustment history.** Shopify logs every stock adjustment with a reason code and timestamp. This is useful for auditing, but it only goes back 180 days and it is not a report in the traditional sense. It is a log. That is essentially it for native inventory reporting. Now here is what is missing. ## Report gap 1: Inventory value over time Shopify can tell you your current inventory value (if you have cost-per-item set for your products), but it cannot show you how that value has changed over time. You cannot see whether your total inventory investment is growing, shrinking, or staying flat. This matters because inventory is usually a merchant’s largest expense. If your inventory value is creeping up month over month without a corresponding increase in sales, you are tying up more and more capital in stock that is not moving. Without a trend line, this drift is invisible. ## Report gap 2: Dead stock identification Shopify does not have a dead stock report. There is no built-in way to see which products have not sold in 30, 60, or 90 days. You can manually cross-reference your sales reports with your inventory list, but that is a time-consuming process that most merchants never do. Dead stock is a bigger problem than many merchants realise. Industry data suggests that well-run companies carry 20-30% dead stock in their inventory, and each unsold item costs roughly 25-30% of its value in holding expenses annually. For DTC brands, dead stock percentages often creep toward a third of total inventory. You need a report that flags products with zero sales over a defined period so you can discount, bundle, or discontinue them before they drain more cash. ## Report gap 3: Sell-through rates by location If you operate multiple Shopify locations (warehouses, retail stores, fulfilment centres), you need to know how stock performs at each one. Shopify’s native reporting does not let you combine location-level inventory data with sales performance in a single view. This means you cannot easily answer questions like: Is Location A selling through product X faster than Location B? Should I transfer stock from one location to another? Which location has the highest overstock problem? ## Report gap 4: Reorder recommendations Shopify can tell you when stock is low, but it cannot tell you how much to reorder or when to place the order based on your sales velocity and supplier lead times. There is no native reorder point calculation. Without this, merchants either reorder too early (tying up cash), too late (leading to stockouts), or in the wrong quantities. A basic reorder report should combine your average daily sales rate, current stock level, and supplier lead time to tell you exactly when and how much to reorder. ## Report gap 5: Inventory trends and velocity Shopify’s adjustment history gives you a 180-day log of stock changes, but it does not calculate velocity or trends. You cannot see how your inventory levels have moved over time for a specific SKU at a specific location. This is a problem for seasonal businesses in particular. If you sell products with annual demand cycles, six months of data is not enough to spot patterns. You need at least a year of daily data to compare seasons and plan purchasing accordingly. ## Report gap 6: Scheduled and automated reports Shopify does not send you inventory reports automatically. Every report requires you to log in, navigate to the analytics section, set your filters, and export manually. There is no way to schedule a weekly dead stock report to your inbox or post a daily low-stock summary to your team’s Slack channel. This means inventory visibility depends entirely on someone remembering to check. In practice, most merchants only look at their inventory data when something has already gone wrong. ## How to fix the gaps You have a few options, depending on how much time and budget you want to invest. **Option 1: Spreadsheets.** Export your sales and inventory data from Shopify, then build your own reports in Google Sheets or Excel. This works but it is manual, time-consuming, and the data goes stale the moment you export it. For stores with fewer than 50 SKUs, this might be manageable. Beyond that, it becomes a part-time job. **Option 2: Custom ShopifyQL explorations.** If you are on Shopify Advanced or Plus, you can write custom queries using ShopifyQL in the analytics section. This is powerful but requires technical knowledge and still has the same underlying data limitations (180-day history, limited location-level metrics). **Option 3: A dedicated inventory analytics app.** This is the most practical solution for most merchants. Apps like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) sit on top of your Shopify data and provide the reports that Shopify does not: dead stock detection, ABC analysis, sell-through rates by location, inventory value tracking, reorder recommendations, and scheduled report delivery via email or Slack. They capture daily inventory snapshots independently of Shopify’s 180-day limitation, giving you up to a year of historical data to work with. The approach you choose depends on your store’s complexity, but the important thing is to close these reporting gaps before they cost you money. ## The real cost of flying blind Inventory reporting might not feel urgent when things are running smoothly. But the cost of not having visibility shows up in ways that are easy to miss: the slow-moving stock you keep reordering because nobody flagged it, the stockout on your best seller because you did not see the trend, the warehouse space consumed by dead products that should have been cleared months ago. Shopify is a great platform for selling. But when it comes to understanding your inventory, the native tools leave too much to guesswork. ## Further reading - [How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days Isn’t Enough](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit) - [How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify) - [Shopify Inventory Reports with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) _Stockful gives Shopify merchants over 100 built-in inventory reports, a builder for the ones nobody wrote, and scheduled delivery to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Shopify Transfers & Incoming Stock | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read You have stock in the wrong place right now. It happens to every store running more than one location. One location is sitting on 200 units of a product that barely moves there, while another is about to run out of the exact same SKU. The reflex is to raise a purchase order and buy more from your supplier. But you do not need more stock. You need to move the stock you already own. This is one of the least glamorous and most expensive problems in inventory management. Capital sits in the wrong place, you pay a supplier for units you already had, and the location that is short loses sales while a warehouse across the country holds the answer. Stockful’s latest release tackles this directly. Transfer suggestions are now fully actionable, stock in transit is tracked as incoming and netted into your recommendations, and you can snooze reorders you are already handling. Here is what changed and how to use it. ## Transfer suggestions you can act on Stockful has always shown you transfer suggestions: when one location has excess stock and another is at risk, it tells you to move units instead of reordering. What is new is that the suggestion is now something you act on without leaving the app. Transfer Suggestions is now a live, interactive report with three tabs: - **Suggested** shows the moves Stockful recommends right now, with the origin location, destination location, SKU, and a suggested quantity. - **In progress** tracks the transfers you have created and are working through. - **Dismissed** holds the suggestions you have set aside, so nothing is lost. You can filter the whole report by origin and destination location, which is useful when you are planning a single shipment between two specific sites rather than working through the full list. ## One click to a Shopify draft transfer When you act on a suggestion, Stockful creates the transfer directly in Shopify as a draft [inventory transfer](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/inventory/inventory-transfers), tagged so you can spot Stockful-created transfers at a glance. The important word is draft. Stockful does not ship anything on your behalf. You stay in control of when the transfer actually moves. From there it follows the normal Shopify lifecycle. The transfer starts as a draft, becomes ready to ship, then shows as in transit. Stockful tracks it through each stage and removes it from the active list once it has been received or cancelled. This split is deliberate. Shopify owns the execution of a transfer: the picking, the shipping, the receiving. Stockful owns the decision: which SKU, how many units, and in which direction. You get an intelligence layer on top of the native Shopify workflow rather than a second system you have to keep in sync. It is also why this works well if you are [switching from Stocky to Stockful](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative). When Shopify removed Stocky’s own transfers in 2025 and moved transfers into the admin, it left a gap. The admin can execute a transfer, but it will not tell you which transfers to make. That decision is exactly what Stockful fills. If a suggestion is not right for you, dismiss it with an optional reason. It moves to the Dismissed tab, and you can restore it later if the situation changes. ## Incoming stock, so you never double order The second half of this release is incoming stock. Any stock in transit, whether from a Shopify inventory transfer or a shipment you have marked as in transit, is now tracked as incoming. The useful part is what Stockful does with that number. Incoming stock is netted into your reorder recommendations, your transfer suggestions, and your dashboard. In plain terms, Stockful will not tell you to reorder a product that already has stock on the way to you. This is one of the most common ways inventory tools quietly waste money. You see a low-stock alert, you raise a purchase order, and then your original shipment lands a week later and you are suddenly overstocked. Netting incoming stock into the recommendation closes that gap. One deliberate detail: incoming stock does not change your stock status or your days of supply. Those numbers still reflect what is physically on hand, because that is what determines whether you can fulfil an order today. Incoming stock changes what you should do next, not what you have this minute. ## Snooze the reorders you are already handling The last piece is small but removes a daily irritation. If a reorder recommendation is one you are already dealing with, perhaps you have emailed the supplier but not raised the formal PO yet, you can now snooze it. Add an optional reason and note, and it moves to a Snoozed tab where you can manage it. This keeps your active reorder list honest. It shows only the decisions you still need to make, not the ones already in motion. ## Getting started Open the Transfer Suggestions report from your reports list. Review the Suggested tab, filter by the two locations you are planning to move stock between, and create a draft transfer for any move that makes sense. Then head into Shopify when you are ready to ship it. If you run more than one location, this is worth doing this week. The fastest inventory win is almost never buying more stock. It is moving the stock you already own to where it will actually sell. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_._ **More from Stockful:** - [Talk to your Shopify inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt) - [Stocky is being removed from Shopify: what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) - [Why Shopify inventory management needs more than native tools](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Shopify Inventory Valuation Explained | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-valuation [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Shopify Inventory Valuation: Understanding What Your Stock Is Actually Worth Your inventory is probably your biggest asset. Here's how to understand what it's actually worth and why Shopify's native tools fall short. 27 Apr 2026 · 6 min read For most Shopify merchants, inventory is the single largest asset on the balance sheet. It is also one of the least understood. Knowing how many units you have is straightforward. Knowing what those units are actually worth, and how that value changes over time, is a different problem entirely. And it is one that Shopify’s native tools handle only at a surface level. Here is why inventory valuation matters, how it works, and what you need to track it properly. ## Why valuation matters beyond accounting Inventory valuation is not just a tax season exercise. It directly affects how you run your business day to day. **Cash flow visibility.** If you have $200,000 tied up in inventory, you need to know whether that number is growing, shrinking, or holding steady. A creeping increase means you are accumulating stock faster than you are selling it, which is a cash flow warning sign. **Profitability accuracy.** Your gross margin depends on knowing what each product costs you. If your cost data is wrong or missing, your margin calculations are unreliable, and you might be selling products at a loss without realising it. **Purchasing decisions.** When you can see total inventory value by category or supplier, you can make smarter decisions about where to invest your next purchasing dollar. Are you overweight in slow-moving categories? Is too much capital locked up with a single supplier? **Insurance and financing.** If you ever need to file an insurance claim or apply for business financing, you will need an accurate inventory valuation. “I think it is about this much” does not hold up. ## How Shopify handles inventory valuation Shopify includes a “cost per item” field for each product variant. If you fill this in, Shopify can calculate basic inventory value (units on hand x cost per item) and show it in the “Month-end inventory value” report. That report totals the available inventory value for products that have a cost assigned. It updates monthly and covers variants that have been adjusted or ordered in the last three years. Here is where it falls short: **No valuation trend over time.** You can see what your inventory was worth at the end of each month, but there is no trend line or chart showing how total value has changed. You cannot easily spot whether your inventory investment is growing. **Missing cost data breaks the numbers.** If even a portion of your products do not have cost-per-item filled in, the valuation report understates your true inventory value. And Shopify does not warn you about this gap. **No breakdown by category or supplier.** The report shows product-level values, but there is no aggregation by product type, vendor, collection, or any other grouping that would help you understand where your capital is allocated. **No location-level valuation.** If you have multiple warehouses or stores, you cannot see how much inventory value is sitting at each location without exporting data and doing the maths yourself. **Cost updates are manual.** When your supplier raises prices, you need to manually update the cost per item in Shopify. And if you received a batch at the old price and a batch at the new price, Shopify does not track weighted average cost. It just uses whatever number is in the cost field right now. ## The cost data problem The foundation of any valuation is accurate cost data. And this is where many Shopify merchants quietly lose track. Cost per item is an optional field in Shopify. It is not required to create a product or sell it. Many merchants leave it blank, especially when they first set up their store. Others fill it in initially but never update it when supplier prices change. The result is a valuation that is either incomplete (missing costs) or outdated (old costs that no longer reflect reality). Neither is useful for decision-making. If you are serious about understanding your inventory value, the first step is auditing your cost data. Go through your product catalogue and ensure every active variant has a current cost per item. This is tedious but essential. Everything else depends on it. ## Valuation methods you should know about There are several standard methods for valuing inventory. Which one you use affects your reported profitability and tax obligations. **FIFO (First In, First Out)** assumes you sell your oldest stock first. If costs are rising, FIFO results in lower cost of goods sold and higher reported profit. **LIFO (Last In, First Out)** assumes you sell your newest stock first. This results in higher COGS and lower reported profit when costs are rising. LIFO is allowed under US GAAP but not under IFRS. **Weighted Average Cost** takes the total cost of all units available and divides by the total number of units. This smooths out price fluctuations and is the simplest to maintain. Shopify does not natively support any of these methods. It uses whatever cost value you have entered for the variant, which is effectively a single static cost. If you buy inventory at different prices over time, Shopify does not track or blend those costs. For most small to mid-size Shopify merchants, weighted average cost is the most practical approach. It requires tracking what you paid for each batch of inventory and updating your average cost as new shipments arrive. ## How to track valuation properly Here is a practical workflow for maintaining accurate inventory valuation on Shopify: **Step 1: Audit your cost-per-item data.** Make sure every variant has a cost assigned. Use Shopify’s bulk editor or a CSV export/import to speed this up. **Step 2: Update costs when you receive inventory.** Every time a purchase order arrives at a different price than what is in Shopify, update the cost field. If you want to track weighted average cost, calculate it yourself: (existing units x existing cost + new units x new cost) / total units. **Step 3: Track total inventory value over time.** Export the month-end inventory value report regularly and log the totals in a spreadsheet. This gives you a manual trend line. **Step 4: Break down value by category.** Use tags, product types, or vendors in your export to group products and see where your capital is concentrated. Alternatively, inventory analytics tools can automate much of this. [Stockful](https://stockful.app) tracks inventory value across all your Shopify locations, captures daily snapshots so you can see valuation trends over time, and breaks down value by product so you know exactly where your money is sitting. ## What good inventory valuation enables Once you have reliable valuation data, you can start answering the questions that actually drive better purchasing: How much of my capital is locked up in products that have not sold in 90 days? Is my total inventory investment growing faster than my revenue? Which product categories give me the best return on inventory investment? Should I be reducing my investment in slow categories and shifting budget to faster-turning ones? These are the kinds of questions that separate merchants who grow profitably from those who grow their topline while their cash quietly disappears into the warehouse. _Stockful tracks your inventory value across every Shopify location with daily snapshots, so you can see where your capital sits and how it moves over time. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock on Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store Dead stock silently drains cash from your Shopify store. Here's how to identify it, calculate what it's costing you, and clear it out. 9 Apr 2026 · 6 min read Dead stock is inventory that has not sold and, realistically, probably will not sell at full price. It sits in your warehouse, takes up space, ties up capital, and quietly eats into your margins. The industry numbers are sobering. Most companies carry somewhere between 20% and 30% dead stock, even well-run ones. For direct-to-consumer brands, that figure often pushes toward a third of total inventory. Each unsold item costs roughly 25-30% of its value per year in holding expenses: storage, insurance, handling, and the opportunity cost of not investing that capital in something that actually sells. Shopify does not have a dead stock report. There is no built-in way to flag products that have not moved in 60 or 90 days. Which means most merchants do not even know how much dead stock they are carrying until they do a physical count and realise half the warehouse is collecting dust. Here is how to find it, measure it, and get rid of it. ## How to define dead stock for your store There is no universal threshold for when slow-moving inventory becomes dead stock. It depends on your product type, price point, and sales cycle. A good starting framework: **Warning zone (60-90 days with no sales).** These products are slowing down and deserve attention. Investigate whether the issue is seasonal, a pricing problem, or genuine lack of demand. **Dead stock (90-180 days with no sales).** If a product has not sold in three to six months and is not seasonal or newly launched, it is likely dead. Start planning clearance strategies. **Write-off territory (180+ days with no sales).** At this point, you are paying more to store the product than you will likely recover from selling it. Consider donating, liquidating, or simply writing it off. Set your own thresholds based on your average product lifecycle and adjust from there. ## Step 1: Find your dead stock Since Shopify does not flag dead stock automatically, you need to identify it yourself. Here are your options: **Manual method.** Export your inventory list and your sales data from Shopify. Cross-reference to find products with stock on hand but zero units sold in the past 90 days. This works but it is tedious and needs to be repeated regularly. **Shopify reports.** The “Percentage of inventory sold” report can highlight products with very low sell-through rates. But it does not specifically flag zero-sale items, and it does not account for restocking during the period. **Inventory analytics tools.** Apps like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) include dedicated dead stock reports that automatically flag products with no sales over your chosen timeframe, showing you exactly what is sitting idle and how much capital it represents. ## Step 2: Calculate what it is costing you Once you have identified your dead stock, quantify the problem. Multiply the number of dead units by their cost price. That is the capital you have locked up. Then add holding costs. As a rough estimate, holding costs run about 25-30% of the inventory’s value per year. So if you have $10,000 in dead stock, it is costing you an additional $2,500-$3,000 per year just to keep it. Finally, consider the opportunity cost. That $10,000 could have been invested in your A items (the products that actually drive revenue). Every dollar sitting in dead stock is a dollar not working for your business. ## Step 3: Clear it out You have several options for moving dead stock, roughly in order of how much value you will recover: **Markdown and promote.** The most straightforward approach. Discount the product enough to create real demand, then promote it through your email list, social media, or a dedicated clearance section on your site. Even recovering 50% of the cost is better than continuing to hold it. **Bundle with popular products.** Pair dead stock with your best sellers as a bonus or add-on. This moves units without requiring steep discounts on the dead items specifically. **Sell through secondary channels.** Liquidation marketplaces, wholesale buyers, or local retailers might take your dead stock at a discount. You will not recover full value, but you will free up cash and space. **Donate for a tax write-off.** If the product cannot be sold at any price, donating it may provide a tax benefit. Check with your accountant on the specifics for your situation. **Write it off.** Sometimes the best business decision is to accept the loss, clear the space, and move on. Do not let sunk cost fallacy keep dead products on your shelves. ## Step 4: Prevent it from happening again Clearing dead stock is a one-time fix. Prevention is the long-term strategy. **Monitor sell-through rates continuously.** If a product’s sell-through rate drops significantly, investigate before it becomes dead stock. A weekly or biweekly review of your slowest-moving products can catch problems early. **Use ABC analysis.** Your C items (the bottom 5-10% of revenue contributors) are the most likely to become dead stock. Keep a closer eye on them and set tighter reorder rules. **Be conservative with new product orders.** Order smaller initial quantities for unproven products. You can always reorder if demand is strong, but you cannot un-buy inventory that does not sell. **Track seasonality.** If a product is seasonal, plan your inventory accordingly. Do not carry winter stock into summer unless you have a clear plan for selling it. **Set automated alerts.** Get notified when a product crosses your slow-mover threshold (for example, fewer than 2 units sold in the last 30 days). Early warning gives you time to act before inventory ages into dead stock. ## Dead stock is a cash flow problem, not a storage problem Merchants tend to think of dead stock as a warehousing issue. But the real damage is financial. Every dollar invested in unsellable inventory is a dollar that is not generating returns. And unlike other expenses, dead stock keeps costing you money the longer you hold it. The fix is not complicated: identify what is not moving, decide what to do with it, and put systems in place to catch the next batch before it accumulates. The hard part is just doing it regularly. ## Further reading - [How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) - [The Shopify Inventory Reports You’re Not Getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [Shopify Inventory Reports with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) - [Shopify ABC Analysis](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) _Stockful’s dead stock report flags Shopify products with no sales over your chosen timeframe and shows the capital tied up in unsold inventory. Get started free at \[stockful.app\]([https://stockful.app](https://stockful.app))._ \*\*Related: \*\*[How to Spot Dead Stock Before It Is Dead](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify) covers the early-warning signals that stop stock going dead in the first place. **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead | Stockful Blog URL: https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read Search for advice on dead stock and you will find the same thing everywhere: how to get rid of it. Run a clearance sale. Bundle it with a bestseller. Donate it for the tax write-off. All reasonable, and all far too late. By the time you are liquidating, the money is already trapped and the loss is mostly locked in. The more useful question is the one almost nobody writes about: how do you see dead stock coming, while you can still do something cheap about it? ## What dead stock really is, and what it is not Dead stock is inventory that has stopped selling and is unlikely to sell again at full price. It is worth separating from two things it gets confused with. It is not the same as overstock, which is stock that still sells but that you simply have too much of. And it is not the same as a slow mover, which sells steadily, just at a low rate. A slow mover is a normal part of a catalogue. Dead stock is a slow mover whose sales have fallen toward zero and stayed there. The cost is the same shape as overstock but worse, because there is no demand left to bail you out: trapped capital, ongoing carrying cost, depreciation, and eventually a write-off. ## Why you usually notice too late Dead stock is invisible in a normal dashboard. It does not error or alert. It just sits there, quietly, while your attention goes to the products that are moving. Shopify’s native tools make this harder. With only 180 days of inventory history, you cannot easily tell a genuinely dead product from one that is simply between seasons, and there is no velocity tracking to show you the trend. So the first real signal many merchants get is a year-end stock count that surfaces a shelf of product nobody has bought. ## The early-warning signals You can catch it far earlier by watching trends rather than waiting for zero. - **Declining velocity.** This is the leading indicator. A product whose weekly sales have been falling for a month or two is heading somewhere, even if it has not hit zero. The trend matters more than the current number. - **Ballooning days of cover.** When sales slow but stock stays high, days of cover climbs. A SKU that quietly moves from 30 days of cover to 200 is telling you something. - **A flagged anomaly.** A sudden, unexpected velocity drop is worth investigating immediately, before it settles into a flat line. Stockful’s anomaly detection surfaces exactly these drops, with a short hypothesis for the likely cause. - **Age with no movement.** Stock on hand that has had no sales in a defined window, weighed against whether that is seasonal or terminal. The seasonal caveat matters. A winter product selling nothing in July is not dead, it is waiting. Telling the two apart needs more history than Shopify keeps natively, which is the whole point of holding longer-term snapshots. ## How to catch it in Stockful Stockful’s Dead Stock report is built around this distinction. It requires prior sales history before flagging something, so a brand-new product that simply has not sold yet is not mislabelled as dead. Read alongside velocity trends and days of supply, it shows you what is genuinely fading rather than what is merely new or seasonal, and anomaly detection gives you an even earlier nudge when a product drops off unexpectedly. ## What to do when you catch it early The earlier you act, the more and cheaper your options. While a product is fading but not dead, you can stop reordering it, transfer it to a location where it still moves, bundle it gently, or run a modest promotion, all of which recover far more value than the deep clearance you are forced into once it is truly dead. And the best prevention is upstream: test new products with smaller first orders, watch your ABC mix, and react to velocity changes instead of discovering them at the annual count. Dead stock is not really an inventory problem you solve at the end. It is one you prevent at the start, by paying attention to the slope, not just the number. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful’s Dead Stock report and anomaly detection flag fading products early, while you still have cheap options._ **More from Stockful:** - Already sitting on dead stock? [How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify) - [How much cash is trapped on your shelves?](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory) - [How to use ABC analysis to prioritise your Shopify inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [Shopify inventory tracking: why 180 days is not enough](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stockful AI: Your Shopify Inventory Assistant URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read Your inventory app has dashboards. It has reports. It has charts and tables and filters. And yet, the question you actually want answered is probably something like: “What should I reorder this week, and why?” Dashboards do not answer questions. They present data and leave the interpretation to you. That is fine when you have time to dig through sell-through rates and cross-reference lead times with velocity trends. It is less fine when you have 600 SKUs across three locations and a supplier email to send before lunch. Stockful’s AI release changes how you interact with your inventory data. Instead of navigating to the right report, setting the right filters, and interpreting the right numbers, you ask a question in plain English and get an answer grounded in your actual shop data, with the specific variants, locations, and metrics behind it. The AI features are included on every Stockful plan, with a per-billing-cycle usage allowance that scales by tier. ## What is shipping: 5 AI features This is not a single chatbot bolted onto an existing dashboard. Stockful’s AI launch includes five distinct features that work together across the entire app. **1\. AI chat assistant** at the top of the app. Ask questions in natural language, get streaming answers with the data behind them. **2\. One-click health check** that scans five dimensions of your store and surfaces 23+ specific findings you can fix with one click. **3\. Explain button** on every metric in the app. Not a tooltip with a generic definition, but a plain-English explanation of what this specific number means for this specific product. **4\. Anomaly detection** that surfaces unexpected changes (sales spikes, velocity drops, surprise stockouts) with a one-sentence hypothesis for why it happened. **5\. Smart setup wizard** that analyses your catalogue and sales history during onboarding and proposes configuration tuned to your store’s actual data. Let’s walk through each one. ## The AI chat assistant The assistant lives in the top navigation of the Stockful app. You type a question, and it responds with a streaming answer that references your real products, real stock levels, and real sales data. Behind the scenes, the assistant has access to over 20 internal tools it can call on your behalf: looking up variants, pulling sales history, checking inventory by location, generating forecasts, fetching reorder lists, suggesting transfer quantities, and more. You do not need to know which tool to use. You just ask in English, and the assistant decides how to get the answer. Here is what that looks like in practice: ### “What should I reorder this week?” The assistant pulls your current reorder list, cross-references lead times and velocity for each product, and returns a ranked list with recommended quantities. The output is specific enough to copy into a supplier email or use as the basis for a purchase order in Shopify. This replaces the workflow of opening the reorder report, reviewing each product, mentally accounting for lead times, and building a PO manually. ### “Why did SKU ABC-123 spike on Tuesday?” The assistant pulls the sales history for that variant, identifies the spike, and checks for adjacent signals: was it featured in a collection? Did a related product stock out, driving substitution demand? Was there a recent tag change suggesting a promotion? The result is a one-sentence hypothesis like “Sales for ABC-123 jumped 340% on Tuesday, likely driven by the related variant DEF-456 going out of stock on Monday.” You can verify the hypothesis yourself, but the assistant does the detective work of correlating signals across your data. ### “What’s at risk of stocking out in the next 14 days?” The assistant cross-references projected stockout dates, lead times, and safety stock levels across all variants and locations. It returns a prioritised triage list: which products will stock out soonest, how many days of supply remain, and whether current lead times leave enough runway to reorder in time. This turns a 30-minute report-digging session into a 10-second question. ### “What should I exclude from tracking?” This is especially useful during setup. The assistant analyses your catalogue and identifies SKUs that are gift cards, samples, archived products, or have erratic velocity patterns that are unlikely to forecast well. It returns a grouped list with rationale for each exclusion, and you can apply the suggestions with one click. The assistant handles questions across six broad categories: reorder timing, diagnosis and root-cause analysis, risk surfacing, setup and configuration help, reporting shortcuts, and cross-location reasoning. The full AI documentation covers the complete range of what you can ask. ## One-click health check The health check is a different kind of AI feature. Instead of waiting for you to ask a question, it proactively scans your store across five dimensions and tells you what needs attention. The five dimensions are: **Data quality.** Are your cost-per-item fields filled in? Are there variants with missing or zero costs that will break your margin and valuation calculations? **Catalogue quality.** Do you have duplicate SKUs, archived products still marked as active, or variants that should be excluded from tracking? **Tracking configuration.** Are your safety stock levels, lead times, and reorder points set appropriately for each product’s velocity? Or are you using defaults that do not match reality? **Forecasting health.** Are there products where the forecast is unreliable due to insufficient sales history, extreme variability, or recent major changes in demand? **Alert health.** Are your Slack alerts and report schedules configured to catch problems before they become costly? The scan surfaces 23+ specific findings, each with a severity rating (critical, warning, or info) and a one-click fix link that takes you directly to the setting or product that needs attention. You can run the health check at any time from `/settings/health-check`. We recommend running it right after installation and then monthly to catch drift. Full details on each finding type are in the health check documentation. ## Explain every metric Every metric in Stockful, whether it is days of supply, velocity, ABC class, reorder point, projected stockout date, sell-through rate, or out-of-stock rate, now has an Explain button. This is different from a tooltip. A tooltip tells you what “days of supply” means in general. The Explain button tells you what this product’s 8.3 days of supply means specifically: that at the current sales rate of 12 units per day, your remaining 100 units will last about 8 days, and given your supplier’s 14-day lead time, you are already past your reorder window. The explanation is generated from the product’s actual data, not a canned definition. It connects the metric to its practical implication, so you understand not just the number but what to do about it. This is useful for merchants still learning inventory management concepts, but equally useful for experienced operators who want a quick sanity check on a number that looks off. See the Explain feature docs for more. ## Anomaly detection with hypotheses Stockful’s anomaly detection runs continuously and surfaces unexpected changes on a dedicated `/anomalies` page: a sudden sales spike for a product that normally moves slowly, a velocity drop that could indicate a listing issue, an unexpected stockout that does not match the forecast. What makes this more than a simple alert is the hypothesis. Each anomaly includes a one-sentence “likely cause” based on the surrounding data. For example: “Velocity for Winter Jacket (Black, M) dropped 65% over the past 7 days, likely due to seasonal demand decline (same pattern observed last year).” The hypothesis is not a guarantee. It is a starting point for investigation, grounded in the data the assistant can see. Sometimes the real cause is something external that does not show up in your Shopify data. But having a data-backed hypothesis saves you from starting every investigation from scratch. Anomaly alerts can optionally be sent to Slack on your schedule. You configure the channel and frequency in `/settings/ai`. Full details in the anomaly detection docs. ## Smart setup wizard Onboarding has always been the awkward part of inventory apps. You install the app, it syncs your products, and then it asks you to configure a list of settings you do not have answers for yet: What should your safety stock be? What lead times should you set? Which products should you exclude? The smart setup wizard analyses your catalogue and sales history during onboarding and proposes answers for you. It examines product velocity to suggest appropriate low-stock thresholds, identifies SKUs that should be excluded from tracking, and sets initial configuration tuned to your store rather than generic defaults. You review and approve everything before it is applied. The wizard proposes; you decide. ## Pricing: included on every plan Every AI feature described above is included on every Stockful plan: the $19.99/month Starter plan, the $39.99/month Growth plan, and the $79.99/month Pro plan. Each plan includes a per-billing-cycle allowance of merchant-initiated AI interactions - chat turns and Explain clicks - sized to the plan. Starter includes 100 per cycle. Growth includes 500. Pro includes 1,000. The allowance resets when your Shopify billing period rolls over. Background AI work - anomaly hypotheses, the weekly summary digest, smart setup analysis - does not count against your allowance. Only things you actively trigger do. If you reach 80% of your allowance, Stockful surfaces an upgrade nudge. If you hit 100%, AI chat pauses until the next billing cycle while everything else in Stockful keeps working. The allowance scales with the plan because heavy AI usage has real underlying cost. Most stores will be well under the cap - but the structure means a one-person shop on Starter and a multi-location operator on Pro both get AI included, sized to how much they are likely to use it. This is worth emphasising because it is unusual. Most apps that add AI features either charge extra for them or gate them behind higher tiers. Stockful’s position is that AI should make the existing product better for everyone, not create a new revenue line. ## Trust and data AI features that touch your business data need clear boundaries. Here is how Stockful handles it. **Opt-in by default.** The weekly AI summary digest and anomaly Slack alerts are off by default. You choose whether to enable them, which Slack channel to use, and what day and time they fire, in your local timezone. **Master toggle.** A single switch in `/settings/ai` disables every AI surface in the app: the chat assistant, the Explain buttons, the health check, and anomaly detection. If you prefer the traditional dashboard-only experience, one click turns AI off entirely. **Inference only.** Your shop data is sent to frontier AI models for inference only. It is not used to train models. No data leaves your shop until you actively invoke an AI feature (ask a question, run a health check, click Explain). Full details on data handling, retention, and the technical architecture are in the privacy and data documentation. ## How it compares The AI landscape in Shopify inventory apps is still early. Here is how the current options stack up: **Shopify Sidekick** is Shopify’s built-in AI assistant. It can answer general questions about your store, but its inventory capabilities are shallow. Community feedback is mixed: merchants report that Sidekick sometimes claims it can run inventory reports but produces empty results. It is a general store management assistant, not an inventory specialist. **Prediko’s Pia** is the closest competitor to Stockful’s AI assistant. Pia is a genuine conversational agent that can surface stockout risks, recommend reorders, and let you dig into data points through chat. It is well-integrated with Prediko’s forecasting and purchase order system. If your primary need is AI-assisted purchasing and supply planning, Pia is strong. Prediko starts at $119/month. Stockful’s AI covers a broader surface area than chat alone: the health check, Explain buttons, anomaly detection with hypotheses, and the smart setup wizard are all unique to Stockful. The focus is on understanding and diagnosing your inventory, not just planning purchases. And every AI feature is included on every plan, with a per-cycle usage allowance that scales by tier, starting at $19.99/month with a 14-day free trial. **Inventory Planner by Sage** and **Stocky** (sunsetting August 2026; [see how Stockful compares to Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative)) do not offer AI chat, health checks, or anomaly detection. If you need AI-powered purchasing with PO automation, Prediko is worth evaluating. If you need AI-powered inventory intelligence and diagnostics at a lower price point, Stockful is built for that. ## Getting started Three steps to your first AI-powered inventory answer: **Step 1: Install Stockful** (or open the app if you already have it). The AI chat panel is in the top navigation bar. **Step 2: Run the health check.** Go to `/settings/health-check` and click “Run scan.” Review the findings and fix anything marked critical. This ensures the AI has clean data to work with. **Step 3: Ask the assistant something.** Try “What should I reorder this week?” and confirm the answer references your real variants, with actual quantities and lead times. You will know within 60 seconds whether the AI is working with your data or generating generic advice. It should be your data. ## Your inventory data already has the answers Your shop already contains enough data to answer most of the inventory questions you have. The problem has never been a lack of data. It has been a lack of time and tooling to extract the answers. The AI assistant, health check, Explain buttons, anomaly detection, and setup wizard are five ways of closing that gap. Each one takes data you already have and turns it into something you can act on. Every feature is live now. Every feature is included on every plan. _Start your free 14-day trial at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Explore the full AI feature set at _[_stockful.app/ai_](https://stockful.app/ai)_._ **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read A forecast is only as good as how well it reads each individual product. A steady everyday seller, a line that only moves at Christmas, and a slow product that sells a handful of units a month all need to be forecast differently. Treat them the same and you get reorder points that are too high on some and too low on others. Stockful’s demand forecasting is built around that idea: instead of one formula applied to everything, it fits a [self-tuning model to every SKU](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting), at every location, from your own sales history. Here’s how it works, and what we just improved. ## A model chosen per product, not one formula for all For each SKU at each location, Stockful considers five candidate models: a flat baseline, a trend, a day-of-week pattern, annual seasonality, and an intermittent-demand model for slow or sporadic sellers. It trains them on up to two years of your Shopify sales history and picks the one that actually fits that product. The important part is how it picks. A richer model is adopted only when it beats the simple baseline on a backtest of that SKU’s own past - the model has to prove itself on history it wasn’t shown before it’s allowed to forecast. If nothing beats the baseline, the baseline stays. That means a forecast can never get worse by trying to be clever; the extra sophistication is only ever used where it earns its place. ## Seasonality, learned per product Seasonal demand is where simple velocity forecasting falls apart. A Christmas line’s average over the year tells you almost nothing about December, and a summer product looks dead for nine months of the year. Stockful learns each product’s seasonal shape from its own history - Christmas lines, summer lines, BFCM spikes - with no manual “same period last year” comparisons to set up. The pattern comes out of the data, per product, which is exactly what up to two years of history is there to make possible. ## Slow movers get their own model Slow, sporadic sellers are where naive forecasting is worst. A product that sells a few units a month, in no particular rhythm, will swing a simple average wildly every time one sale lands. Averaging noise just produces more noise. Those SKUs get a dedicated intermittent-demand model instead - one built for exactly this pattern - so their reorder points stop lurching around on the back of one or two orders. ## Reading around stockouts Days you couldn’t sell shouldn’t count against a product’s demand. If something was out of stock for two weeks, its sales for that period were zero because of supply, not demand. Stockful’s velocity is out-of-stock aware: it doesn’t let those empty days drag the rate down, and it quantifies the sales you lost to the stockout rather than pretending demand was low. Safety stock is then [computed statistically](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify) from your chosen service level and your product’s actual demand variability - and it accounts for supplier lead-time variability too, so a less reliable supplier earns a bigger buffer without you maintaining the numbers by hand. ## New: forecasting that reads your promotions Here’s the piece we just shipped, built on top of that deeper history. Run a discount week and a velocity-based forecast gets fooled. The promoted product looks like it suddenly sells far more than usual, its reorder point climbs with the spike, and your next order over-buys against demand that only existed because the item was on sale. The promotion ends, demand drops back, and you’re [left holding stock](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory) you bought against a number that was never real. Stockful now recognises discounted days and treats that jump as a temporary lift rather than your everyday demand, so reorder points stay steady through and after a sale. It also tells the difference between a one-off promotion and a product you simply always sell at a lower price - so a regular-discount line is read as the steady seller it is, not mistaken for a spike to correct for. The result is reorder points that reflect real underlying demand, even around your busiest sale periods. ## Every forecast proves itself Because each model has to beat a baseline on held-out history before it’s adopted, every forecast starts life having earned its place. Stockful then keeps measuring accuracy against what actually sells, continuously, so a model that stops fitting gets caught rather than quietly drifting. Confidence bands and reorder points are shown right on the charts, and suggested reorder quantities are tethered to real observed sales - including the same season last year - never to model speculation. That’s the whole idea: forecasting that tunes itself to each product, proves itself on your own history, and reads the messy real-world stuff - seasonality, slow movers, stockouts, and now promotions - instead of being thrown by it. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_ with a 14-day free trial. Stockful forecasts demand per SKU, learns each product’s pattern, and times your reorders around real underlying demand._ **More from Stockful:** - [Demand forecasting for Shopify that learns every product](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) - [Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide) - [How to set reorder points that actually work](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores) - [The true cost of a stockout on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stockful + Shopify Flow: Inventory Automations URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read Inventory dashboards are useful. But they still require someone to look at them. The gap in most inventory workflows is not the data itself. It is the space between seeing a problem and doing something about it. A product drops below its reorder point on Tuesday. Someone notices on Thursday. The purchase order goes out Friday. The supplier ships the following week. By then, you have been out of stock for days. Stockful’s Shopify Flow integration closes that gap. Instead of watching dashboards and acting on what you see, you build automations that act the moment something changes. Low stock, stockouts, velocity shifts, ABC class changes: they all become triggers that kick off workflows automatically, right inside Shopify Flow’s visual editor. No Zapier. No webhooks. No code. ## What Shopify Flow is (and why it matters here) If you have not used Shopify Flow before, here is the short version: it is a free automation tool built into Shopify that uses a trigger, condition, action model. Something happens (trigger), you check whether certain criteria are met (condition), and then Flow does something in response (action). Flow is powerful on its own for basic automations like tagging orders or sending emails. But its real potential opens up when apps expose their own triggers and actions into Flow. That is what Stockful now does. Previously, if you wanted to automate an inventory workflow based on Stockful’s analytics (like sending a Slack alert when a bestseller’s velocity drops), you would need to check the app, interpret the data, and act manually. Now, Stockful fires triggers directly into Flow, and you can build the entire response chain visually. ## The 10 triggers Stockful exposes 10 triggers into Shopify Flow, grouped by what they monitor. ### Stock state changes These fire when a product’s inventory status changes: **Low stock detected.** Fires when inventory falls below the low-stock threshold at a specific location. The trigger payload also includes the calculated reorder point, reorder quantity, and current velocity, so you can act without needing a separate data lookup. **Out of stock.** Fires when a product hits zero available units at any tracked location. **Restocked.** Fires when a previously out-of-stock product receives new inventory. Useful for reversing any actions you took when the product stocked out (like removing a tag or unpausing a campaign). **Reorder point reached.** Fires when stock hits the calculated reorder point, which factors in sales velocity, supplier lead time, and safety stock. Unlike the low-stock trigger (which crosses a threshold you configure), this is Stockful’s forecast-driven signal that it is time to reorder. **Overstock.** Fires when a product’s stock significantly exceeds projected demand, based on current velocity and lead time. **Dead stock.** Fires when a product has had zero sales for a defined period and still has units on hand. ### Forecasting signals These fire when Stockful’s analytics detect a meaningful change in a product’s performance: **Stockout projected.** Fires when current velocity and stock levels indicate a product will stock out within a defined future window. **Velocity changed.** Fires when a product’s sales velocity shifts meaningfully (up or down) compared to its recent baseline. **ABC class change.** Fires when a product moves between ABC classifications. For example, a B-class product that has been gaining momentum gets reclassified as A-class. ### Milestones **Sell-through milestone.** Fires when a product reaches a sell-through percentage threshold (for example, 75% of starting inventory sold). Every trigger includes the full Shopify Product reference, which means Flow has access to the product’s tags, collections, vendor, product type, and all other standard Shopify fields. Triggers also include calculated fields like reorder quantity and current velocity directly in the payload, so most workflows do not need a separate “get data” step. All triggers fire in real time, within seconds of the underlying inventory change. ## The 9 actions Actions are what Flow does in response to a trigger. Stockful exposes 9 actions, grouped by function. ### Query data These actions pull specific data from Stockful into your workflow: **Get forecast.** Returns the demand forecast for a product, including projected units needed and days of stock remaining. **Get inventory health.** Returns the product’s health metrics: ABC class, sell-through rate, velocity, overstock status, and dead stock flag. **Get stock by location.** Returns current stock levels for a product broken down by each tracked Shopify location. **Get reorder list.** Returns all products currently needing reorder, with recommended quantities. This is particularly useful with Flow’s scheduled trigger for building automated weekly reports. **Get transfer suggestion.** Returns suggested transfers between locations to balance stock distribution. ### Update settings These actions change how Stockful calculates and plans for a product: **Set safety stock.** Updates the safety stock level for a product. Useful for dynamically adjusting buffers before and after peak periods. **Set lead time.** Updates the supplier lead time used in reorder calculations. **Set demand adjustment.** Applies a percentage modifier to a product’s demand forecast. This is the key action for sale event planning: bump forecast up before a promotion, reset it after. ### Communication **Send Slack message.** Sends a formatted message to a specified Slack channel with product details, stock levels, and recommended actions. ## 5 workflows you can build today Here are practical examples of what these triggers and actions make possible. Each one replaces a manual process that most merchants either do inconsistently or skip entirely. ### 1\. Auto-tag low-stock products for a dynamic collection **The problem:** You want customers to see a “Last Chance” or “Low Stock” collection on your store, but manually tagging and untagging products is tedious and often forgotten. **The workflow:** First flow: Trigger is “Low stock detected.” Action is Shopify’s native “Add product tag” with the tag `low-stock`. Second flow: Trigger is “Restocked.” Action is Shopify’s native “Remove product tag” to remove `low-stock`. In Shopify, create an automated collection filtered to the `low-stock` tag. Products appear when they hit low stock and disappear when they are restocked. The collection maintains itself. **Why it matters:** Low-stock urgency can drive conversion. Displaying it automatically means you capture that value without any manual work. ### 2\. Slack alert when an A-class bestseller stocks out **The problem:** All stockouts are bad, but a stockout on one of your top revenue-driving products is an emergency. You need to know immediately, not the next time someone checks the dashboard. **The workflow:** Trigger is “Out of stock.” Condition checks that the SKU field is not empty (filters out non-inventory products). Action is “Get inventory health.” Condition checks that `abc_class` equals `A`. Action is “Send Slack message” to your `#inventory-alerts` channel, including the product name, SKU, and last known velocity. **Why it matters:** This workflow creates a tiered alert system. C-class stockouts might not need an immediate Slack ping. A-class stockouts do. The ABC classification makes the distinction automatically. ### 3\. Weekly automated reorder report **The problem:** Your purchasing team needs to review what needs to be reordered, but pulling the report manually every Monday is one of those tasks that slips through the cracks. **The workflow:** Trigger is Shopify Flow’s built-in “Scheduled time” set to every Monday at 9am. Action is “Get reorder list.” Condition checks that the total count is greater than 0 (no point sending an empty report). Action is “Send Slack message” to `#purchasing` with the product list and recommended quantities. **Why it matters:** Purchasing decisions happen on a rhythm. Automating the report ensures the data is waiting for your team every Monday morning, regardless of whether anyone remembered to pull it. ### 4\. Demand adjustment for sales events **The problem:** You are running a 3-day flash sale next week. Your normal demand forecast does not account for the spike in sales that a 30% discount will generate. If Stockful’s reorder calculations use normal velocity, your reorder recommendations will be too low. **The workflow:** First flow: Trigger is “Scheduled time” set to one week before the sale. Action is “Set demand adjustment” to +50% for products tagged `flash-sale`. This tells Stockful to factor in higher expected demand for those products. Second flow: Trigger is “Scheduled time” set to the day after the sale ends. Action is “Set demand adjustment” back to 0% for the same products. **Why it matters:** Your forecast stays accurate during promotions without you having to remember to adjust it manually before and after. Set it up once, and the adjustment handles itself every time you tag products for a sale. ### 5\. Transfer suggestion on location imbalance **The problem:** Location A is running low on a product, but Location B has plenty. Nobody notices the imbalance until Location A stocks out, even though a simple transfer could have prevented it. **The workflow:** Trigger is “Low stock detected.” Action is “Get transfer suggestion.” Condition checks if a suggestion exists (meaning another location has surplus stock). Action is “Send Slack message” to your operations channel with the transfer recommendation: which product, how many units, from which location to which. **Why it matters:** Multi-location merchants waste significant time and money on avoidable stockouts that could be solved with internal transfers. This workflow catches imbalances and flags them automatically. ## How this is different from other inventory apps Most inventory apps on the Shopify App Store, including the now-retired Stocky and tools like Inventory Planner, do not expose triggers or actions into Shopify Flow. Their automation capabilities are limited to what the app itself offers (typically email alerts and in-app notifications). This means that if you want to connect an inventory event to a Shopify action (like tagging a product, updating a collection, or sending a Slack message), you are stuck using middleware like Zapier, writing custom webhook handlers, or doing it manually. Stockful’s Flow integration removes that layer entirely. Your inventory intelligence lives inside the same automation system as the rest of your Shopify workflows. You build everything in Flow’s visual editor, using the same drag-and-drop interface you already know. The practical benefit: fewer disconnected tools, faster response times (triggers fire in seconds, not on polling intervals), and workflows that are easy to build, understand, and maintain. ## How to get started Setting up your first Flow workflow with Stockful takes three steps: **Step 1: Install Stockful.** If you have not already, install [Stockful](https://stockful.app) from the Shopify App Store. The Flow triggers and actions are available on every Stockful plan. Plans start at $19.99/month with a 14-day free trial. **Step 2: Open Shopify Flow.** Go to Apps in your Shopify admin and open Flow. Create a new workflow. When you search for triggers or actions, you will see Stockful’s options alongside Shopify’s native ones. **Step 3: Build your workflow.** Pick a trigger, add conditions, and wire up your actions. Start with something simple (like the Slack alert for A-class stockouts) and expand from there. For detailed documentation on every trigger and action, including field references and example payloads, see the [full Flow integration docs](https://docs.stockful.app/flow/overview). ## Stop watching dashboards. Start building workflows. Dashboards tell you what happened. Workflows respond to what is happening. The shift from passive monitoring to active automation is the difference between catching a problem at 9am on Monday (when someone checks the report) and catching it at 2:14pm on Saturday (when it actually happens). Every trigger and action is available now, on every Stockful plan. Plans start at $19.99/month with a [14-day free trial](https://stockful.app). _Get started at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Explore the full Flow integration at _[_docs.stockful.app/flow/overview_](https://docs.stockful.app/flow/overview)_._ **More from Stockful:** - [Stockful vs Stocky: the analytics replacement for Shopify’s retired app](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) - [Shopify inventory management without spreadsheets](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stockful's new Shopify inventory reporting engine | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-inventory-reporting-engine [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # The Inventory Questions You Could Not Answer Before Stockful's fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine: over 100 reports that run live, a builder for the questions nobody wrote a report for, and delivery to five channels. 17 Aug 2026 · 8 min read Here is a question that, until this week, you could not answer inside Stockful without a spreadsheet: which of my A items sold slower last month than the month before, at one location, ignoring the days they were out of stock? Every piece of that was already in the data. Daily snapshots per variant per location, ABC classes, sell-through, and the out-of-stock windows to exclude. What was missing was a way to ask. The fourteen reports each answered one fixed question well, and if your question was not one of those fourteen, you opened the closest report, filtered it, wrote the number down, changed the date range, wrote the second number down, and finished the job in Excel. That is what changed. The fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine. ## What you can answer now **Which products got worse, rather than which products are bad.** A low sell-through number tells you where you are. It does not tell you which direction you are moving. Every report now takes a comparison period, so you can put last month next to the month before and sort by the change instead of the level. The products that fell the furthest are usually the ones worth a decision, and they are rarely the ones at the bottom of the list. **The same question, split by something you choose.** Location, product type, vendor, ABC class. The built-in reports had the splits they were written with. Now the split is a dimension you pick, so “dead stock by vendor” and “sell-through by product type” are two clicks apart rather than two reports nobody wrote. **Questions that need more than one metric.** Days of supply against lead time. Units sold against units on hand. Margin against velocity. The interesting inventory questions are almost always two numbers in the same row, and until now the second number lived in a different report. **Whether anyone actually read the thing you scheduled.** More on that below, but it turns out to be the question people ask most often. ## Over 100 reports, none of which need generating The library went from fourteen to 101, grouped by area: stock health, forecasting and analysis, valuation and operations, sales and margin, pricing and promotions, stock movement, replenishment, and purchasing and suppliers. The ones you already used are still there, still called what they were called: Low Stock, Out of Stock, Lost to Stockouts, Overstocked, Clearance Recommendations, Dead Stock, Zero Sales, Inventory Valuation, Reorder Recommendations, ABC Analysis, Location Comparison, Transfer Suggestions, Profit/COGS and Sell-Through Rate. The rest fill in around them. Every one of them runs live against your current data. There is no generate step and no overnight job, so a report you open at 4pm reflects the stock you have at 4pm. That works because the reports sit on top of daily inventory snapshots Stockful has been capturing per variant per location all along, which is also why they can look further back than [Shopify’s 180 days of history](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit). The full list is in the [built-in reports documentation](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/reports/built-in-reports). ## When the library does not have it, build it Reports > New exploration. Pick any metrics and dimensions, filter and group them, set a date range and a comparison, and choose a chart. Save it and it lands alongside the built-in reports, behaving like one: filterable, schedulable, exportable. This is the part that matters most, and it is worth being blunt about why. A fixed report library is a bet that whoever wrote it anticipated your question. For the common questions that bet pays off, which is why [the reports Shopify does not give you](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) are so predictable. For everything else it does not, and the honest answer used to be a CSV export. Now the answer is that you build the report, once, and it is there next month too. ## The same report, as a query Underneath every report is the query that produced it, written in StockfulQL. It reads like SQL: ``` FROM sales SHOW total_revenue GROUP BY product DURING last_month COMPARE TO previous_period ORDER BY total_revenue DESC LIMIT 10 ``` That is last month’s ten biggest products by revenue, each row carrying its change against the month before. Add a `VISUALIZE total_revenue TYPE bar` line and the table becomes a bar chart. You will rarely type this. The report editor writes the query as you click, and the query is just the thing it wrote. It matters that it is there anyway, because the builder’s controls have a ceiling and queries do not. The moment you want something the dropdowns almost express is the moment most reporting tools make you leave and open a spreadsheet. Three things worth knowing about it. The editor has autocomplete, highlighting and inline validation, so you find out a query is wrong while writing it rather than after running it. The whole query travels in the report’s URL, so sending someone a link sends them the exact report instead of a description of one. And if you would rather not write StockfulQL at all, you can ask the AI assistant for what you want in plain language and it will write the query for you. Queries run against your inventory, sales, purchasing and returns data. The [StockfulQL overview](https://docs.stockful.app/stockfulql/overview) covers the clause set and the datasets. ## Getting the answer to the person who needs it A report you have to remember to open is a report you will stop opening. Any report, built-in or one you built, can go on a schedule and be delivered to five places: email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. The last two are the ones worth pausing on. A scheduled report writing into a Google Sheet means the spreadsheet your buyer already works in refreshes itself, rather than being rebuilt by hand every Monday. You choose whether each run overwrites the same tab, appends rows to it, adds a new tab, or creates a new file, which is the difference between a live dashboard and an audit trail. Airtable works the same way, adding or updating rows against a key field like SKU. Setup for each is in the [scheduling documentation](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/reports/scheduling). One detail that matters more than it sounds: a schedule runs a saved report, and saved date ranges are relative. A report saved as “last 30 days” sends the most recent 30 days on every run, not a window frozen on the day you saved it. One distinction to keep straight, because it catches people out: Sheets and Airtable are channels for _report schedules_. Stock alerts are a separate system and still go to Slack or email only. If you want a low-stock trigger in a spreadsheet, you schedule the Low Stock report to it rather than pointing an alert at it. For everything else there are exports. Tabular data comes out as CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL, either the rows on screen or the full result set behind them. Reports built around a chart can also go out as a one-page PDF with the chart rendered, so something you built for a board pack arrives still looking like a chart. A plain table has no PDF, which is the right call: a PDF of a spreadsheet helps nobody. ## Run history, or: did it actually send Every run is recorded: when it happened, which schedule and report it was, which channel it went to, whether a person or the schedule set it going, how long it took, how many rows it contained, and the recipient list exactly as it stood at the time. Outcomes are Delivered, Nothing to report, Not delivered, or In progress. This sounds like plumbing and is not. The failure mode of scheduled reporting is silent: the schedule breaks, or the Slack channel gets archived, or the recipient list was wrong from the start, and nobody notices for six weeks because a report that does not arrive does not announce itself. When your buyer says they never got the Monday stock report, run history is the difference between checking and guessing. “Nothing to report” is worth calling out separately, because it is the outcome people misread. An empty Low Stock report is not a broken schedule. It is good news, and the log says which one you are looking at. ## What it costs Nothing extra. The full library, the builder, StockfulQL, all five delivery channels, exports and run history are on every Stockful plan, from $19.99 a month. Stockful has never gated features by tier and this is not where that starts. The plans differ on how many SKUs and locations you track, and that is all. ## The shape of the change The old reports answered fourteen questions well. That is genuinely useful and it is also a ceiling, because the questions worth asking about your own inventory are specific to your catalogue in ways no report library can anticipate. Adding more fixed reports raises the ceiling. Letting you write the report removes it. Start with the built-in reports, because most of the time one of them is the answer. When it is not, the builder is one click away, and whatever you build is a report from then on. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_ with a 14-day free trial. Stockful gives Shopify merchants over 100 inventory reports, a builder for the rest, and scheduled delivery to five channels._ **More from Stockful:** - [Inventory reports for Shopify: the full library](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) - [The Shopify inventory reports you’re not getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [How to use ABC analysis to prioritise your Shopify inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [What sell-through rate actually tells you](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Shopify inventory metafields: live stock badges | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read Your inventory data has been doing one job: telling you what is in stock and what is not. It lives in the admin, powers your internal reports, and occasionally triggers an alert. But inventory data is also one of the strongest conversion levers in ecommerce. “Only 3 left” drives urgency. “In stock at your nearest store” builds confidence. A product selling 50 units per day signals social proof. These are all inventory signals, and most Shopify merchants never put them in front of their customers. The reason is simple: getting real-time inventory data onto your storefront has historically required custom development. You need a developer to write Liquid code, connect to the right data source, handle edge cases, and maintain it when your theme updates. Stockful’s new storefront data feature changes that. It writes 11 inventory metafields directly to your Shopify products and ships two configurable theme blocks you can drag onto any product page in the theme editor. For developers building custom or headless storefronts, a JavaScript API (`window.stockful`) exposes the full dataset for complete flexibility. No code required for the standard setup. Full control available for those who want it. ## What is new Stockful now does three things it did not do before: **Metafield sync.** Stockful writes 11 inventory-derived metafields to your Shopify products and variants, updated in real time for stock status and daily for analytics metrics. These metafields are accessible in Liquid templates, the Shopify Storefront API (for headless builds), and through a JavaScript global. **Theme blocks.** Two pre-built theme blocks, Stockful Badge and Stockful Location Availability, can be added to any product page template through the Shopify theme editor. They are fully configurable (shape, colours, display options) and require no code. **Developer API.** A `window.stockful` JavaScript global provides the full inventory dataset for any product on the page, enabling custom integrations in bespoke Liquid themes or headless storefronts. All three are available on every Stockful plan. ## The 11 metafields Stockful syncs 11 metafields to your Shopify products, split between variant-level and product-level data. All metafields live under the namespace `app--326028230657--stockful`. ### 7 variant-level metafields These are attached to individual product variants, giving you granular data for each size, colour, or option: **stock\_status.** The variant’s current inventory state: in stock, low stock, or out of stock. This updates within seconds of an inventory change, so your storefront always reflects reality. **available\_quantity.** The number of units currently available for sale. Combined with your theme logic, this powers “Only X left” messaging. **velocity.** The variant’s average daily sales rate, calculated from Stockful’s historical data. A high velocity number is social proof: this product is popular and moving fast. **days\_of\_supply.** How many days of stock remain at the current sales rate. When this drops below a threshold, it is a natural urgency signal. **low\_stock\_threshold.** The point at which Stockful considers the variant to be low stock. Exposing this is optional but useful for custom Liquid logic. **reorder\_point.** The inventory level at which a reorder should be placed. Primarily useful for internal-facing storefront tools or B2B contexts. **sold\_count.** The number of units sold in the trailing period. “147 sold this week” is a social proof signal that most stores leave unused. ### 4 product-level metafields These are attached at the product level and aggregate data across all variants: **stock\_status.** The product’s overall status. If any variant is in stock, the product-level status reflects that. **abc\_class.** The product’s ABC classification (A, B, or C). While this is primarily an ops metric, it has merchandising applications: you might display urgency badges only on A-class products, since those are the items customers care most about being available. **velocity.** The product-level daily sales rate across all variants. **days\_of\_supply.** The product-level days of supply, useful for broad “selling fast” indicators. ### What each metafield unlocks The metafields are building blocks. Here is what they enable on the storefront: `stock_status` powers basic stock badges (in stock, low stock, out of stock) with no additional logic needed. `available_quantity` powers “Only X left” urgency messaging. `velocity` and `sold_count` power social proof (“selling fast”, “X sold this week”). `days_of_supply` powers time-based urgency (“only 3 days of stock left at this rate”). `abc_class` lets you selectively apply urgency tactics to your most important products. The real-time metafields (`stock_status`, `available_quantity`) update within seconds of an inventory change. The analytics metafields (`velocity`, `days_of_supply`, `sold_count`, and others) sync once per day, which is appropriate for their slower-changing nature. ## The two theme blocks For merchants who want the conversion benefits without writing any code, Stockful ships two theme blocks that work with any Online Store 2.0 compatible theme. ### Stockful Badge This block displays a stock status indicator on your product page. It can show the current state (in stock, low stock, out of stock), urgency messaging based on available quantity or days of supply, and social proof based on velocity or sold count. The block is configurable directly in the theme editor: You choose the badge shape and colour scheme. You control which data points to display (stock status only, quantity remaining, velocity, or a combination). You set the thresholds for when urgency messaging appears (for example, show “Only X left” when available quantity drops below 10). You decide whether to show the badge on all products or only when certain conditions are met. The result is a polished, on-brand stock indicator that updates automatically as inventory changes, without you touching code or manually updating product descriptions. ### Stockful Location Availability This block adds a “Check store availability” button to your product page. When a customer clicks it, a drawer slides open showing which of your Shopify locations have the product in stock, along with available quantities at each. This is particularly valuable for merchants with both online and physical retail locations. Customers can see whether a product is available at their nearest store before making a trip, or choose to buy online if no local store has it. The block is configurable: you choose which locations to display (you probably do not want to show your central warehouse), set the button text, and control the drawer’s visual style. ## For developers: the `window.stockful` API If you are building a custom Liquid theme or a headless storefront, the pre-built theme blocks may not fit your design. The `window.stockful` JavaScript global gives you direct access to the full inventory dataset for any product on the page. This lets you build completely custom stock displays, integrate inventory data into existing theme components, or pipe the data into a React or Vue frontend in a headless architecture. For Liquid templates, you can access the metafields directly. Here is how to read a product’s stock status: ``` {{ product.metafields.app--326028230657--stockful.stock_status.value }} ``` For headless storefronts using the Shopify Storefront API, query the metafields via GraphQL: ``` query ProductWithStock($handle: String!) { product(handle: $handle) { stockStatus: metafield(namespace: "app--326028230657--stockful", key: "stock_status") { value } } } ``` The full developer documentation, including the complete `window.stockful` object reference and example implementations, is at [docs.stockful.app/storefront/developer-api](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/developer-api). For the full metafield schema and type definitions, see the [data reference](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/data-reference). ## Setup walkthrough Getting storefront data live takes three steps. ### Step 1: Enable storefront data in Stockful Open the Stockful app in your Shopify admin. Go to Settings, then Storefront. Toggle “Enable storefront data” and choose which metafields you want to sync. You can enable all 11 or just the ones relevant to your use case (for example, only `stock_status` and `available_quantity` if you just want a basic stock badge). Once enabled, Stockful begins writing metafields to your products immediately. ### Step 2: Activate the app embed In your Shopify admin, go to Online Store, then Themes, then Customize. In the theme editor, open the App embeds panel (in the left sidebar). Find Stockful and enable it. This loads the lightweight script that powers the theme blocks and the `window.stockful` API. ### Step 3: Add blocks to your product page Still in the theme editor, navigate to your product page template. Click “Add block” and look for Stockful Badge or Stockful Location Availability. Drag the block into your desired position on the page, configure the display options, and save. That is it. Your product pages now display live inventory data. For a detailed visual walkthrough, see the [theme blocks guide](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/guides/theme-blocks). ## Example patterns Here are four common patterns merchants build with storefront data. ### Urgency badge: “Only X left” Use the Stockful Badge block with quantity display enabled. Set a threshold (for example, show quantity only when `available_quantity` is below 15). When a product has 8 units remaining, customers see “Only 8 left” directly on the product page. When it is restocked above 15, the quantity message disappears and a standard “In stock” badge shows instead. This pattern is effective because it creates genuine urgency based on real data, not manufactured scarcity. ### Social proof: “Selling fast” Use the velocity or sold\_count metafield to trigger a “Selling fast” label. If a product is moving more than, say, 5 units per day, display the badge. This is particularly powerful for newer products that do not yet have reviews or ratings but are demonstrably popular based on sales data. ### Multi-location availability Drop in the Stockful Location Availability block. Customers click “Check store availability” and see a location-by-location breakdown. This is valuable for retailers with physical stores because it answers the question “Can I get this at my local branch?” before the customer has to call or visit. It also works as a conversion nudge: if the customer’s nearest store is out of stock, the drawer makes it obvious that buying online and shipping to home is the faster option. ### Custom Liquid: conditional badges for A-class products only Using Liquid directly, you can build conditional logic that displays urgency badges only for your most important products: ``` {% if product.metafields.app--326028230657--stockful.abc_class.value == "A" %} {% if product.metafields.app--326028230657--stockful.stock_status.value == "low_stock" %} Low stock, order soon {% endif %} {% endif %} ``` This prevents urgency badge fatigue. If every product on your store has a “Low stock” badge, customers stop believing it. Reserving urgency signals for your genuine bestsellers (A-class products) keeps them credible. For more storefront patterns, including velocity-based badges and conditional displays for seasonal products, see the [examples library](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/examples). ## Why this matters Most Shopify inventory apps are admin-only tools. They help merchants manage stock, but the data never reaches the customer. Stockful’s storefront data bridges that gap. The principle is straightforward: your inventory data is already telling a story about your products. Which ones are popular. Which ones are running low. Where they are available. Sharing that story with customers, selectively and honestly, improves the shopping experience and drives conversion. Urgency works because it is real. Social proof works because it is real. Location availability works because it solves a genuine customer question. None of these require exaggeration or manipulation. They just require putting accurate inventory data where customers can see it. Stockful gives you the data pipeline (metafields updated in real time), the no-code option (theme blocks), and the developer toolkit (`window.stockful` and Storefront API access) to make it happen however your store is built. _Get started at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. See the full storefront documentation at _[_docs.stockful.app/storefront/overview_](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/overview)_._ **More from Stockful:** - [How Stockful replaces Shopify’s 180-day inventory tracking limit](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) - [Managing inventory across multiple Shopify locations](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Your Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 Stocky shuts down 31 August 2026. Export your suppliers, purchase orders and costs before they vanish. A step-by-step checklist of what to save and how. 15 Jun 2026 · 5 min read Stocky shuts down for good on 31 August 2026. After that date, anything you have not exported is gone. Shopify has been clear that some of your data, supplier records and historical purchase orders in particular, will not automatically carry over to whatever you use next. If you want it, you have to export it yourself, while Stocky still opens. This is the narrow, practical version of that job: exactly what to pull out of Stocky, in what order, and where to put it. If you want the wider picture of what is changing and how to choose a replacement, start with our overview of [what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now). This post is just the export. A quick word on timing before the list. Do not leave this to the last week of August. Export now, while you still have time to notice what is missing and go back for it. A rushed export on 30 August is how supplier records get lost. ## 1\. Supplier records This is the data most at risk and the hardest to rebuild, so do it first. Stocky holds your supplier names, contact details, and the link between each supplier and the products you buy from them. Export your full supplier list, and for each supplier note the lead time and any minimum order quantities you have recorded. If Stocky will not export a field cleanly, copy it into a spreadsheet by hand. It is tedious, but rebuilding supplier relationships from memory later is worse. Keep this in a single spreadsheet with one row per supplier and clear columns for contact, lead time, and the SKUs they supply. You will import or re-enter this into your next tool, so a clean structure now saves time later. ## 2\. Purchase order history Your past purchase orders are a record of what you paid, when, and to whom. That history is useful for negotiating with suppliers, spotting cost creep, and understanding your real lead times. Export every purchase order you can, including the line items, unit costs, order dates, and received dates. If you can only export a summary, prioritise the cost and date fields. Received dates matter more than people expect, because the gap between order date and received date is your actual historical lead time, which is the basis of any sensible reorder planning. ## 3\. Cost data Stocky updated your unit costs when you received inventory against a purchase order. Shopify’s native receiving flow does not do this automatically, so your cost data is both valuable and at risk of drifting once Stocky is gone. Export your current cost per item for every SKU. This underpins your margin and inventory valuation calculations in any tool you move to. A catalogue with missing or zero costs will quietly break those reports, so an accurate snapshot now is worth the effort. ## 4\. Stocktake and adjustment records If you have run stocktakes in Stocky, export the records. They are your audit trail for stock corrections, and they help explain discrepancies that surface later. This is lower priority than suppliers and costs, but it is easy to grab while you are in there. ## 5\. The reports you actually use Finally, export any Stocky reports you rely on month to month. Even if your new tool produces better versions, having the historical numbers gives you a baseline to compare against, so you can tell whether things genuinely improved after the switch. ## Where this data should land Two destinations matter. First, a safe archive. Keep every raw export in a clearly labelled folder, untouched, as your permanent record. Do not edit these files. They are your fallback if anything looks wrong later. Second, your next tool. Supplier records, lead times, and cost data should go into whatever you use after Stocky, because those three feed every reorder and valuation decision you will make. If you move to [Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management), cost and supplier data flow into your reports, reorder recommendations, and inventory valuation, and your historical sales already come straight from Shopify, so you are not rebuilding velocity from scratch. Worth knowing before you start typing anything up by hand: Stockful now has a [Stocky migration tool](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) that does most of this list for you. It connects to Stocky’s API and imports your suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments directly, with landed cost reconstructed on the historical orders. It reads from Stocky’s API, so it is bound by the same 31 August deadline - but it means the archive below is your safety net rather than your only copy. ## Do the export, then breathe The export is the one part of the Stocky shutdown with a hard, unmovable deadline. A replacement, such as [our Stocky alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative), can be chosen and changed later. Lost supplier records and cost history cannot be recovered after 31 August. So treat this as a single afternoon’s work, done soon: pull your suppliers, purchase orders, costs, stocktakes, and key reports, archive the raw files, and load the essentials into your next tool - by hand, or with the [migration tool](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) if you are landing on Stockful. Once that is done, the rest of the migration is a decision you can take at your own pace. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful gives you daily inventory snapshots, demand forecasting, supplier management with lead times, and the reports Shopify’s native tools leave out._ **More from Stockful:** - [Stocky is being removed from Shopify: what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) - [How to replace Stocky’s replenishment and transfers on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify) - [Stocky vs Shopify native vs a dedicated app: what actually gets replaced](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app) - [Stockful vs Stockie: which Stocky replacement fits?](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stocky Is Leaving Shopify: What to Do Now | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Stocky Is Being Removed From Shopify: What Merchants Need to Do Now Stocky is shutting down on August 31, 2026. Learn what’s changing in Shopify inventory management, what features you’re losing, what Shopify offers as a replacement, and the exact steps merchants should take now to migrate smoothly. 29 Mar 2026 · 8 min read If you’ve been using Stocky to manage inventory in your Shopify store, you’ve probably already noticed things breaking. Shopify has confirmed that Stocky is shutting down for good on **August 31, 2026**, and the app was already delisted from the App Store back in February. Key features like inventory transfers and min/max forecasting were removed even earlier, in July 2025. This isn’t a “maybe it’ll come back” situation. Stocky is done. And if you haven’t started planning your migration, August is closer than it feels. Here’s what’s actually happening, what you’re losing, what Shopify is offering as a replacement, and what you should do about it, starting today. ## The timeline: what’s already gone and what’s next There are three dates that matter: **July 7, 2025.** Shopify removed inventory transfers and min/max forecasting from Stocky. If you relied on replenishment workflows or automated reorder suggestions, those stopped working months ago. **February 2, 2026.** Stocky was pulled from the Shopify App Store. You can no longer install or reinstall it. If you uninstall it now, there’s no getting it back. **August 31, 2026.** Full shutdown. Stocky stops working entirely. Any data you haven’t exported will be gone. That last point is critical. Shopify has warned that certain data, especially supplier records and historical purchase orders, won’t automatically carry over to any replacement system. If you don’t export it yourself before the deadline, you lose it permanently. ## What Shopify is doing about it Shopify isn’t leaving merchants with nothing. They’ve been absorbing several of Stocky’s core operational features into the Shopify admin over the past year. Purchase orders, inventory transfers, stocktakes, and basic stock tracking are all now handled natively inside the admin panel. For many merchants, especially those who only used Stocky for purchase orders and receiving inventory, the built-in tools might be enough. You can create POs, track incoming stock, manage transfers between locations, and receive inventory against orders, all without a third-party app. But there’s a significant gap. The native tools don’t replicate everything Stocky offered, and for some workflows, the replacement is noticeably weaker. ## What you’re actually losing Here’s where things get uncomfortable. Shopify’s built-in inventory tools cover the operational basics, but they fall short in several areas that mattered most to merchants who relied heavily on Stocky. **Demand forecasting is gone.** Stocky offered sales-based forecasting to help you decide what to reorder and when. Shopify’s native tools don’t include any forecasting capability. You’re back to guessing or building spreadsheets. **ABC analysis isn’t included.** Stocky could categorize your products by revenue contribution, the classic A/B/C breakdown that tells you which SKUs are driving your business and which are dead weight. The Shopify admin doesn’t do this. **Supplier management is limited.** Stocky tracked supplier details, lead times, and pricing in one place. While Shopify’s purchase order system includes a basic supplier directory, the depth isn’t comparable. And crucially, supplier data from Stocky won’t migrate automatically. **Advanced reporting disappears.** Sell-through rates, inventory velocity, detailed stock analytics. Stocky provided a reporting layer on top of your inventory data that Shopify’s native system simply doesn’t match. The admin gives you adjustment history and current stock levels, but deeper analysis requires additional tools. **Automatic cost updates on receiving are missing.** Several merchants in the Shopify community forums have flagged this: when you received inventory against a purchase order in Stocky, it automatically updated your unit costs. The native Shopify workflow only adjusts quantities. Updating costs is now a separate manual step, which means your margin calculations and inventory valuations can drift if you’re not careful. ## Step-by-step: what to do right now Don’t wait until July to start this. Migration takes time, and you want to be running your new system alongside Stocky (while it still works) to catch any gaps before the shutdown. ### 1\. Export everything from Stocky Start with your historical data. Download your purchase order history, stocktake records, supplier information, and any reports you regularly use. Stocky’s export options aren’t comprehensive, and supplier data in particular may need to be copied manually. Do this now, while you still have access. ### 2\. Audit how you actually use Stocky Be honest about which features matter to your business. If you mostly used Stocky for creating and receiving purchase orders, Shopify’s native tools will likely cover you. If you depended on forecasting, reporting, or multi-location analytics, you need a third-party solution. Write down the specific workflows you run weekly or monthly: reordering, stock counts, location transfers, performance reviews. This becomes your requirements list. ### 3\. Clean up your Shopify inventory data Before migrating to any new system, make sure your foundation is solid. Run a full inventory count to correct discrepancies. Fix negative stock levels, remove duplicate SKUs, and deactivate old locations you’re no longer using. Every tool you evaluate will work better with clean data. ### 4\. Evaluate your options The right replacement depends on your needs. Here’s how to think about it: **If you mainly need purchase orders and transfers**, Shopify’s built-in admin tools are probably sufficient. They handle the basics well and there’s no extra cost. **If you need inventory analytics, reporting, and forecasting**, this is where the gap is widest. Shopify’s native reporting is minimal. You get current stock levels and 180 days of adjustment history, but no trend analysis, no velocity tracking, no sell-through rates, and no scheduled reports. Tools like [Stockful](https://stockful.app) focus specifically on this problem, capturing daily inventory snapshots across every location and providing reports like ABC analysis, dead stock detection, demand forecasting with OOS-aware velocity, supplier management with lead times, and reorder recommendations - everything Stocky offered and more. **If you make what you sell**, you need raw materials and bills of materials, not just finished-goods counts. Stocky had neither, so bakeries, candle makers and cosmetics brands have been running their ingredients in a spreadsheet alongside it. Stockful now [tracks raw materials](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) as their own catalogue, records what each product is made of, and runs production batches that consume material and write the finished goods back to Shopify. It does not do expiry dating or lot traceability, so if you need recall-grade records you still need something purpose-built. ### 5\. Run your new system in parallel Whatever you choose, install it now and run it alongside Stocky for at least a few weeks. Compare the data. Make sure your workflows translate cleanly. It’s far easier to troubleshoot discrepancies when you have both systems running than to discover problems after Stocky goes dark. ### 6\. Train your team before the deadline If other people on your team use Stocky, especially retail staff doing stocktakes or receiving inventory through POS, they need to learn the new workflow before August. Don’t let the shutdown day be the first time someone tries to receive a purchase order in the new system. ## The 180-day problem that nobody talks about There’s a quieter issue worth flagging beyond the Stocky shutdown itself. Shopify’s native inventory tracking only retains 180 days of adjustment history. That means once Stocky is gone and you’re relying solely on Shopify’s built-in tools, you have no way to look at inventory trends over longer periods. Six months of data isn’t enough for seasonal businesses. If you sell products with annual demand cycles (holiday merchandise, summer gear, back-to-school items), you can’t see year-over-year patterns with only 180 days of history. You can’t calculate meaningful sell-through rates. You can’t spot slow-moving stock before it becomes dead stock. This is one of the reasons many merchants are adding an analytics layer on top of Shopify’s native tools rather than trying to replace everything Stocky did with a single app. Shopify handles the operational side (POs, transfers, stock adjustments). A dedicated analytics tool handles the visibility side (trends, velocity, forecasting, reports). ## Don’t wait for a perfect solution The Stocky shutdown is frustrating, but it’s also a forcing function. Many merchants were running on Stocky because it was free and bundled with POS Pro, not because it was the best tool for their needs. The forecasting was unreliable. The reporting was limited. The app hadn’t seen meaningful feature development in years. Treat this as an opportunity to actually assess what your business needs from inventory management in 2026, rather than settling for whatever comes bundled with your plan. Start by exporting your data. Audit your workflows. Clean your inventory. Test a replacement before the August deadline. Your future self will thank you for not leaving this until the last week of August. ## Further reading - [How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) - [The Shopify Inventory Reports You’re Not Getting](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) - [Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days Isn’t Enough](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit) - [Stocky Alternative for Shopify](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) - [Stockful vs Stockie: comparing Stocky replacements](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) - [Shopify Inventory Management with Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) Need better visibility into your Shopify inventory? [Stockful](https://stockful.app) gives you daily inventory snapshots, over 100 built-in reports, ABC analysis, demand forecasting, supplier management, and Slack alerts - everything Shopify’s native tools are missing. Get started free at [stockful.app](https://stockful.app). **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Stocky vs Shopify Native Inventory | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read Now that Stocky is closing on 31 August 2026, the honest question is not which replacement is best. It is what you actually need to replace. For some stores the answer is nothing beyond Shopify’s own admin. For others there is a real gap. This is a straight comparison of what Stocky did, what Shopify’s native tools now cover, and where a dedicated app earns its place. If you want the migration steps rather than the comparison, our overview of [what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) walks through them. This post is about drawing the line between native is enough and you need more. ## The operational basics: Shopify native is fine Start with the good news, because it is genuinely good. Over the past year Shopify has moved Stocky’s core operational features into the admin. - **Purchase orders.** You can create POs, add line items and costs, and receive against them natively. - **Inventory transfers.** You can move stock between locations in the admin. - **Stocktakes and adjustments.** Counting and correcting stock is built in. - **Basic stock tracking.** Quantities across locations, with low-stock thresholds. If you mostly used Stocky to raise purchase orders and receive inventory, Shopify’s native tools will very likely cover you, at no extra cost. Be honest with yourself here. Do not pay for an app to replace features you were not really using. A clean audit of how you actually used Stocky is the most useful hour you can spend. ## Where the native tools stop The native tools cover execution. Where they fall short is anything that involves analysis, prediction, or history. These are the gaps Stocky users tend to feel within the first month. - **Demand forecasting.** Stocky offered sales-based forecasting. Shopify’s admin has none, so reorder timing is back to judgement and spreadsheets. - **Reorder decisions.** Native tools record a purchase order once you decide what to buy. They will not tell you what to buy or how much. - **ABC analysis.** Stocky could rank products by revenue contribution. The admin does not, so prioritising your catalogue is manual. - **Advanced reporting.** Sell-through rate, inventory velocity, dead stock, and detailed valuation are not in the native tools. - **Automatic cost updates on receiving.** Stocky updated unit costs when you received a PO. Shopify’s native flow adjusts quantities but not costs, so your margins and valuation can drift if you are not careful. - **Long-term history.** This is the quiet one. Shopify’s native inventory tracking keeps only 180 days of adjustment history, which is not enough for a seasonal business to see year-on-year patterns. We covered this in [why 180 days is not enough](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit). None of these are operational features. They are the visibility and decision-making layer, which is precisely the part that does not live in an order-and-receive system. ## Where a dedicated app earns its place A dedicated inventory app makes sense when the gaps above are costing you real money or real time. The clearest signals are these: - You run more than one location and need to decide what to move where. - You sell seasonal products and need more than 180 days of history. - You are making reorder decisions by hand and getting them wrong often enough to notice, through stockouts or overstock. - You want to know your margins, dead stock, and sell-through without building it in a spreadsheet. This is the layer [Stockful](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) is built for. It captures daily inventory snapshots across every location, keeps history well beyond 180 days, and adds the reports the native tools leave out: ABC analysis, dead stock, sell-through, valuation, demand forecasting with stockout-aware velocity, reorder recommendations, and transfer suggestions. It sits on top of Shopify’s native order-and-receive workflow rather than replacing it. It is worth saying plainly: this is not the only option, and a different shape of business may want a different tool. A manufacturer needs bill-of-materials and production features that neither Stocky nor a Shopify-first analytics app provides. The right answer depends on what you actually do. ## The simplest way to decide Picture the three layers. Shopify’s native admin handles execution: orders, receiving, transfers, counts. A dedicated app handles visibility and decisions: forecasting, reporting, reorder and transfer guidance, long-term history. Stocky used to straddle both, unevenly in places, and now it is going. So the decision is not really finding a [Stocky replacement](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative). It is this: keep execution in Shopify, and decide whether you need the visibility layer on top. If you only ever used Stocky to raise POs, you are done. If you used it to decide what to stock, that is the part you need to rebuild. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful adds the forecasting, reporting, and reorder guidance Shopify’s native tools leave out, on top of the admin you already use._ **More from Stockful:** - [Stocky is being removed from Shopify: what merchants need to do now](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) - [Your Stocky export checklist before 31 August 2026](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown) - [How to replace Stocky’s replenishment and transfers on Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # ABC Analysis - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/ABC%20Analysis The Stockful blog # Tagged: ABC Analysis Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged ABC Analysis. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Counts: How to Run Cycle Counts Without Shutting Down Full inventory counts disrupt your operation. Cycle counting is faster, less painful, and keeps your stock accurate year-round. Here's how. 14 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-cycle-counts-inventory)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Shopify ### How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory Learn how ABC analysis helps Shopify merchants focus on their most profitable products, cut dead stock, and make smarter reorder decisions. 30 Mar 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) --- # Dead Stock - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Dead%20Stock The Stockful blog # Tagged: Dead Stock Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Dead Stock. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify)[Shopify ### What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store Dead stock silently drains cash from your Shopify store. Here's how to identify it, calculate what it's costing you, and clear it out. 9 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify) --- # Demand Forecasting - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Demand%20Forecasting The Stockful blog # Tagged: Demand Forecasting Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Demand Forecasting. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### How Much Safety Stock Is Enough (Without Tying Up Cash)? Too little safety stock means stockouts; too much drains cash. How to size safety stock per SKU using your real demand variability and lead times. 3 Aug 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands The classic reorder point formula assumes steady demand and fixed lead times. DTC has neither. What goes wrong, and how to set reorder points that hold. 27 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify)[Shopify ### How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade)[Shopify ### The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify)[Shopify ### Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor Stockful's MCP server connects your inventory to the AI tools you already use. Ask about stock, forecasts and margins, and act with confirmation. 8 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026)[Shopify ### Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful)[Shopify ### How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Shopify ### Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide) --- # Inventory Management - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Inventory%20Management The Stockful blog # Tagged: Inventory Management Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Inventory Management. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### The Inventory Questions You Could Not Answer Before Stockful's fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine: over 100 reports that run live, a builder for the questions nobody wrote a report for, and delivery to five channels. 17 Aug 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-inventory-reporting-engine)[Shopify ### What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You (and the Number Most Stores Get Wrong) Sell-through rate is simple to calculate and easy to misread. What it really signals about buying and pricing, and how to track it across your catalogue. 10 Aug 2026 · 3 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify)[Shopify ### From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order)[Shopify ### How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade)[Shopify ### How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify)[Shopify ### Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app)[Shopify ### Your Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 Stocky shuts down 31 August 2026. Export your suppliers, purchase orders and costs before they vanish. A step-by-step checklist of what to save and how. 15 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown)[Shopify ### Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor Stockful's MCP server connects your inventory to the AI tools you already use. Ask about stock, forecasts and margins, and act with confirmation. 8 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt)[Shopify ### Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Counts: How to Run Cycle Counts Without Shutting Down Full inventory counts disrupt your operation. Cycle counting is faster, less painful, and keeps your stock accurate year-round. Here's how. 14 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-cycle-counts-inventory)[Shopify ### How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026)[Shopify ### Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful)[Shopify ### Sell-Through Rate Explained: The Shopify Metric You're Probably Ignoring Sell-through rate shows how fast your inventory turns into sales. Here's how to calculate it, what good looks like, and why it matters. 4 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Valuation: Understanding What Your Stock Is Actually Worth Your inventory is probably your biggest asset. Here's how to understand what it's actually worth and why Shopify's native tools fall short. 27 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-valuation)[Shopify ### How to Calculate Safety Stock for Your Shopify Store Safety stock prevents stockouts when demand spikes or suppliers run late. Here's how to calculate it for your Shopify products. 23 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days of History Isn't Enough Shopify only keeps 180 days of inventory adjustment history. Here's why that's a problem and what you can do about it. 20 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit)[Shopify ### Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Shopify ### Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide)[Shopify ### What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store Dead stock silently drains cash from your Shopify store. Here's how to identify it, calculate what it's costing you, and clear it out. 9 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Managing Inventory Across Multiple Shopify Locations Without Spreadsheets Running multiple Shopify locations? Here's how to track, balance, and report on inventory across warehouses and stores without spreadsheets. 6 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/multi-location-shopify-inventory-management)[Shopify ### The Shopify Inventory Reports You're Not Getting (and How to Fix It) Shopify's built-in inventory reports have major gaps. Here are the reports you're missing and how to get the data you actually need. 2 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing)[Shopify ### How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory Learn how ABC analysis helps Shopify merchants focus on their most profitable products, cut dead stock, and make smarter reorder decisions. 30 Mar 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### Stocky Is Being Removed From Shopify: What Merchants Need to Do Now Stocky is shutting down on August 31, 2026. Learn what’s changing in Shopify inventory management, what features you’re losing, what Shopify offers as a replacement, and the exact steps merchants should take now to migrate smoothly. 29 Mar 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) --- # Inventory Reports - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Inventory%20Reports The Stockful blog # Tagged: Inventory Reports Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Inventory Reports. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### The Inventory Questions You Could Not Answer Before Stockful's fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine: over 100 reports that run live, a builder for the questions nobody wrote a report for, and delivery to five channels. 17 Aug 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-inventory-reporting-engine)[Shopify ### What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You (and the Number Most Stores Get Wrong) Sell-through rate is simple to calculate and easy to misread. What it really signals about buying and pricing, and how to track it across your catalogue. 10 Aug 2026 · 3 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify)[Shopify ### How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful)[Shopify ### Sell-Through Rate Explained: The Shopify Metric You're Probably Ignoring Sell-through rate shows how fast your inventory turns into sales. Here's how to calculate it, what good looks like, and why it matters. 4 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Valuation: Understanding What Your Stock Is Actually Worth Your inventory is probably your biggest asset. Here's how to understand what it's actually worth and why Shopify's native tools fall short. 27 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-valuation)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days of History Isn't Enough Shopify only keeps 180 days of inventory adjustment history. Here's why that's a problem and what you can do about it. 20 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit)[Shopify ### Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields)[Shopify ### The Shopify Inventory Reports You're Not Getting (and How to Fix It) Shopify's built-in inventory reports have major gaps. Here are the reports you're missing and how to get the data you actually need. 2 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing) --- # Multi-Location - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Multi-Location The Stockful blog # Tagged: Multi-Location Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Multi-Location. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify)[Shopify ### Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock)[Shopify ### Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields)[Shopify ### Managing Inventory Across Multiple Shopify Locations Without Spreadsheets Running multiple Shopify locations? Here's how to track, balance, and report on inventory across warehouses and stores without spreadsheets. 6 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/multi-location-shopify-inventory-management) --- # Purchase Orders - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Purchase%20Orders The Stockful blog # Tagged: Purchase Orders Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Purchase Orders. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order) --- # Reorder Management - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Reorder%20Management The Stockful blog # Tagged: Reorder Management Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Reorder Management. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### How Much Safety Stock Is Enough (Without Tying Up Cash)? Too little safety stock means stockouts; too much drains cash. How to size safety stock per SKU using your real demand variability and lead times. 3 Aug 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands The classic reorder point formula assumes steady demand and fixed lead times. DTC has neither. What goes wrong, and how to set reorder points that hold. 27 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify)[Shopify ### From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order)[Shopify ### How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade)[Shopify ### The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify)[Shopify ### Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026)[Shopify ### How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### How to Calculate Safety Stock for Your Shopify Store Safety stock prevents stockouts when demand spikes or suppliers run late. Here's how to calculate it for your Shopify products. 23 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Shopify ### Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide)[Shopify ### What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores) --- # Shopify - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify The Stockful blog # Tagged: Shopify Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Shopify. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### The Inventory Questions You Could Not Answer Before Stockful's fourteen fixed reports are now a reporting engine: over 100 reports that run live, a builder for the questions nobody wrote a report for, and delivery to five channels. 17 Aug 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-inventory-reporting-engine)[Shopify ### What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You (and the Number Most Stores Get Wrong) Sell-through rate is simple to calculate and easy to misread. What it really signals about buying and pricing, and how to track it across your catalogue. 10 Aug 2026 · 3 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify)[Shopify ### How Much Safety Stock Is Enough (Without Tying Up Cash)? Too little safety stock means stockouts; too much drains cash. How to size safety stock per SKU using your real demand variability and lead times. 3 Aug 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/how-much-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Why the Textbook Reorder Point Formula Breaks for DTC Brands The classic reorder point formula assumes steady demand and fixed lead times. DTC has neither. What goes wrong, and how to set reorder points that hold. 27 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Spot Dead Stock Before It's Dead Most advice tells you how to clear dead stock. This shows how to catch it early, using sales velocity and days of supply, before it ties up your cash. 23 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-dead-stock-before-it-happens-shopify)[Shopify ### From Reorder Recommendation to Purchase Order - Without Retyping Knowing what to reorder is half the job; getting it onto a purchase order is the other half. How Stockful turns recommendations into a draft order per supplier, sends it, receives it and lands the true cost. 20 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-recommendations-to-shopify-purchase-order)[Shopify ### How Stockful's Demand Forecasting Works - and What Just Got Better Stockful fits a self-tuning model to every SKU, learns each product's seasonality, and now reads your promotions so a discount week doesn't inflate your reorder points. Here's how the forecasting works. 18 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-demand-forecasting-upgrade)[Shopify ### How Much Cash Is Trapped on Your Shelves? Overstock quietly ties up the cash you need to grow. How to spot slow movers, quantify trapped capital, and free it up without hurting availability. 13 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify)[Shopify ### Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app)[Shopify ### How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify)[Shopify ### Your Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 Stocky shuts down 31 August 2026. Export your suppliers, purchase orders and costs before they vanish. A step-by-step checklist of what to save and how. 15 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown)[Shopify ### Talk to Your Shopify Inventory in Claude, ChatGPT, or Cursor Stockful's MCP server connects your inventory to the AI tools you already use. Ask about stock, forecasts and margins, and act with confirmation. 8 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-mcp-server-claude-chatgpt)[Shopify ### Move Stock Instead of Reordering It: Actionable Transfers and Incoming Stock Stockful's transfer suggestions are now one-click: create a draft Shopify inventory transfer, and incoming stock nets into your reorder recommendations. 1 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-transfers-incoming-stock)[Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Counts: How to Run Cycle Counts Without Shutting Down Full inventory counts disrupt your operation. Cycle counting is faster, less painful, and keeps your stock accurate year-round. Here's how. 14 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-cycle-counts-inventory)[Shopify ### How to Prepare Your Shopify Inventory for BFCM 2026 BFCM 2026 is November 27-30. Here's a practical inventory preparation timeline so you're stocked, not stressed, when the traffic hits. 11 May 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/prepare-shopify-inventory-bfcm-2026)[Shopify ### Inventory Planner vs Stockful: Which Shopify Inventory App Is Right for You? Inventory Planner and Stockful solve different problems. Here's an honest comparison to help you pick the right tool for your Shopify store. 7 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-planner-vs-stockful)[Shopify ### Sell-Through Rate Explained: The Shopify Metric You're Probably Ignoring Sell-through rate shows how fast your inventory turns into sales. Here's how to calculate it, what good looks like, and why it matters. 4 May 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify)[Shopify ### How to Set Reorder Points That Actually Work for Shopify Stores Reorder points tell you when to buy more stock. Here's how to calculate them properly so you stop guessing and start ordering at the right time. 30 Apr 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-points-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Valuation: Understanding What Your Stock Is Actually Worth Your inventory is probably your biggest asset. Here's how to understand what it's actually worth and why Shopify's native tools fall short. 27 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-valuation)[Shopify ### How to Calculate Safety Stock for Your Shopify Store Safety stock prevents stockouts when demand spikes or suppliers run late. Here's how to calculate it for your Shopify products. 23 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/calculate-safety-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Shopify Inventory Tracking: Why 180 Days of History Isn't Enough Shopify only keeps 180 days of inventory adjustment history. Here's why that's a problem and what you can do about it. 20 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-180-day-inventory-history-limit)[Shopify ### Turn Your Shopify Inventory Data Into a Conversion Tool With Storefront Badges and Metafields Stockful writes 11 inventory metafields to Shopify and ships two no-code theme blocks. Add stock badges and location availability to any product page. 19 Apr 2026 · 9 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-storefront-inventory-badges-metafields)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration)[Shopify ### Demand Forecasting for Shopify: A Practical Guide for Store Owners Demand forecasting helps you buy the right stock at the right time. Here's a practical approach for Shopify merchants, no data science degree required. 16 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/demand-forecasting-shopify-guide)[Shopify ### What Is Inventory Velocity and Why It Matters for Shopify Stores Inventory velocity measures how fast your stock turns into revenue. Learn how to calculate it, what it reveals, and how to improve it. 13 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/inventory-velocity-shopify-stores)[Shopify ### How to Spot and Clear Dead Stock in Your Shopify Store Dead stock silently drains cash from your Shopify store. Here's how to identify it, calculate what it's costing you, and clear it out. 9 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/spot-clear-dead-stock-shopify)[Shopify ### Managing Inventory Across Multiple Shopify Locations Without Spreadsheets Running multiple Shopify locations? Here's how to track, balance, and report on inventory across warehouses and stores without spreadsheets. 6 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/multi-location-shopify-inventory-management)[Shopify ### The Shopify Inventory Reports You're Not Getting (and How to Fix It) Shopify's built-in inventory reports have major gaps. Here are the reports you're missing and how to get the data you actually need. 2 Apr 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/shopify-inventory-reports-missing)[Shopify ### How to Use ABC Analysis to Prioritize Your Shopify Inventory Learn how ABC analysis helps Shopify merchants focus on their most profitable products, cut dead stock, and make smarter reorder decisions. 30 Mar 2026 · 6 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory)[Shopify ### Stocky Is Being Removed From Shopify: What Merchants Need to Do Now Stocky is shutting down on August 31, 2026. Learn what’s changing in Shopify inventory management, what features you’re losing, what Shopify offers as a replacement, and the exact steps merchants should take now to migrate smoothly. 29 Mar 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) --- # Slack Alerts - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Slack%20Alerts The Stockful blog # Tagged: Slack Alerts Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Slack Alerts. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### Stockful AI: An Inventory Assistant That Actually Knows Your Shopify Store Stockful's AI assistant answers inventory questions using your real shop data. Plus a one-click health check, anomaly detection, and more. Every plan. 24 May 2026 · 11 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-ai-inventory-assistant-shopify)[Shopify ### Stockful + Shopify Flow: Automate Your Inventory Workflows With No-Code Stockful now integrates with Shopify Flow, giving you 10 inventory triggers and 9 actions to automate reordering, alerts, tagging, and more. 17 Apr 2026 · 10 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stockful-shopify-flow-integration) --- # Stocky - Shopify Inventory Guides | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Stocky The Stockful blog # Tagged: Stocky Practical Shopify inventory guides tagged Stocky. [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify ### Stocky vs Shopify Native vs a Dedicated App: What Actually Gets Replaced With Stocky gone, what does Shopify's native admin actually replace, and where do you still need a dedicated app? A clear, honest feature comparison. 29 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-vs-shopify-native-inventory-app)[Shopify ### How to Replace Stocky's Replenishment and Transfers on Shopify Stocky removed inventory transfers and min/max replenishment in 2025. How to rebuild your reorder and transfer workflows on Shopify before the shutdown. 22 Jun 2026 · 4 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/replace-stocky-replenishment-transfers-shopify)[Shopify ### Your Stocky Export Checklist Before 31 August 2026 Stocky shuts down 31 August 2026. Export your suppliers, purchase orders and costs before they vanish. A step-by-step checklist of what to save and how. 15 Jun 2026 · 5 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-export-checklist-before-shutdown)[Shopify ### Stocky Is Being Removed From Shopify: What Merchants Need to Do Now Stocky is shutting down on August 31, 2026. Learn what’s changing in Shopify inventory management, what features you’re losing, what Shopify offers as a replacement, and the exact steps merchants should take now to migrate smoothly. 29 Mar 2026 · 8 min read](https://stockful.app/blog/stocky-removed-from-shopify-what-merchants-need-to-do-now) --- # The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/true-cost-of-stockouts-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # The True Cost of a Stockout on Shopify (and How to Find Yours) A stockout costs far more than one lost sale. The full cost, why most shoppers leave for a competitor, and how to calculate your own lost revenue. 6 Jul 2026 · 4 min read Most people think of a stockout as a single missed sale. A customer wanted to buy, the product was not there, they left. One lost order, move on. That framing badly understates the damage, because the real cost of a stockout unfolds over days and weeks, and most of it never shows up in your sales dashboard. Here is what a stockout actually costs, why Shopify stores are especially exposed, and how to work out your own number from data you already have. ## What a stockout actually costs you Start with the obvious part and then keep going, because the obvious part is the smallest. **The direct lost margin.** The units you would have sold while out of stock, at your price, at your margin. Real money, but only the tip of it. **The customer who does not come back.** Studies repeatedly find that the majority of shoppers, roughly 69%, will simply buy from a competitor when a product is unavailable. Some of those never return. You do not just lose the order, you lose the future orders that customer would have placed, which is often the larger figure once you account for lifetime value. **The ad spend you already paid.** If you are running paid traffic, every click that lands on an out-of-stock product is money spent sending someone to a closed door. Your return on ad spend quietly drops, and the cause is sitting in your inventory, not your campaigns. **Lost momentum.** A product that sells nothing for a week loses its place. On marketplaces this hits search rank directly. On your own store it affects best-seller sorting and the velocity signals that drive merchandising. Recovering to where you were takes time after the stock comes back. **The rebound cost.** Stockouts trigger panic. You expedite a reorder at premium shipping rates, or you over-order to make sure it never happens again, and a few weeks later you are sitting on overstock instead. The original problem creates the next one. ## Why Shopify stores are especially exposed This is not a rare problem. One analysis of Shopify and Amazon stores found that more than half of Shopify products went out of stock at least once over the course of a year. Part of the reason is structural. Shopify’s native low-stock alerts are blunt, its inventory history only goes back 180 days, and it has no demand forecasting, so it will not warn you that a fast mover is about to run dry. The other part is that direct-to-consumer demand is spiky. A promotion, a paid campaign, or a single viral moment can clear a month of stock in a weekend, and an average-based view never sees it coming. ## How to calculate your own number The basic formula is simple: **Lost revenue = lost units x price x margin**, where **lost units = average daily sales velocity x days out of stock**. So a product selling 12 units a day at a 40% margin and a $30 price, out of stock for 6 days, costs roughly 12 x 6 x 30 x 0.40, or about $864 in lost margin from a single short stockout. Add the customer churn and ad waste on top. There are two catches that trip most people up. First, you need to know when each SKU was actually at zero, by day, across the period. That requires daily inventory snapshots, which Shopify does not keep for long. Second, and more subtle, your velocity has to ignore the stockout itself. A product that sold zero units because it was out of stock looks like it slowed down, which drags your average daily sales down, which makes the lost-revenue figure look smaller than it was. Velocity that is aware of out-of-stock periods, and only counts days the product was actually available, gives you the true number. This is exactly what Stockful’s Lost Revenue report does. It uses daily snapshots to know when each SKU was at zero, and stockout-aware velocity to estimate what you would have sold, so the figure reflects real demand rather than the demand that survived the stockout. ## Turning the number into fewer stockouts Knowing the cost is only useful if it changes what you do. The fix is upstream, in how you reorder. - Set reorder points that account for your supplier lead time, so the order goes in with enough runway to arrive before you hit zero. (More on why the [textbook reorder point formula breaks for DTC](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify).) - Use days-of-cover alerts rather than a fixed unit threshold, so a fast mover triggers earlier than a slow one. (See days of cover explained.) - Watch your A items hardest. A stockout on a top revenue product costs far more than one on a long-tail SKU, so that is where buffers and attention belong. A stockout is rarely just a lost sale. Put a real number on it, and the case for catching it early makes itself. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful’s Lost Revenue report turns your stockouts into an actual figure, using daily snapshots and stockout-aware velocity._ **More from Stockful:** - [How much cash is trapped on your shelves?](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory) - [Why the textbook reorder point formula breaks for DTC brands](https://stockful.app/blog/reorder-point-formula-problems-dtc-shopify) - [Why Shopify inventory management needs more than native tools](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # What Sell-Through Rate Really Tells You | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/blog/what-sell-through-rate-tells-you-shopify [← All posts](https://stockful.app/blog) [Shopify](https://stockful.app/blog/tag/Shopify) # What Sell-Through Rate Actually Tells You (and the Number Most Stores Get Wrong) Sell-through rate is simple to calculate and easy to misread. What it really signals about buying and pricing, and how to track it across your catalogue. 10 Aug 2026 · 3 min read Sell-through rate is one of the easiest inventory metrics to calculate and one of the easiest to misread. Most stores either ignore it or look at a single number that quietly tells them the wrong thing. Used properly, it is one of the clearest signals you have for what to reorder, what to discount, and what to stop buying. ## What sell-through rate is Sell-through rate is the percentage of a product you sold out of what you had available, over a defined period: **Sell-through rate = units sold / (units sold + units remaining) x 100** So if you brought in 100 units and sold 70 of them in 30 days, your 30-day sell-through is 70%. It tells you how quickly a product is moving relative to how much of it you committed to. ## The number most stores get wrong The mistake is almost always the period. Sell-through means nothing without a clear window and a clear starting quantity. A product showing 90% sell-through “all time” that you have stocked for two years is not performing. It is barely moving, the figure just looks healthy because the clock has been running forever. The same 90% in 30 days is a different story entirely. Always tie sell-through to a period, and compare products over the same window rather than against each other’s lifetimes. The second mistake is reading one store-wide number. Sell-through is a per-SKU signal. A blended catalogue figure hides the fast movers you should reorder and the slow ones you should not, which is the entire reason to track it. ## Why high is not always good It is tempting to treat high sell-through as a pure win, but a product that sold out fast is also a product you may have under-ordered. High sell-through paired with a stockout is lost revenue wearing a success badge. That is why you read it alongside days of supply: high sell-through with healthy cover is strong demand, high sell-through with near-zero stock is a reorder you are already late on. Low sell-through is the inverse warning: a slow mover, an overstock risk, or a product that is mispriced. There is no universal target. A fashion brand chasing fresh ranges wants very different numbers from a store selling steady staples. The useful comparison is your own products against each other, over the same period, not an industry figure from a blog. ## How to actually use it - **Buying.** Strong, fast sell-through is your signal to reorder, and to order more next time. Persistent low sell-through means order less or discontinue. - **Pricing.** Something selling out almost instantly may be underpriced and leaving margin on the table. Something stuck at low sell-through for months may need a markdown before it becomes dead stock. - **Together with other metrics.** Read it with ABC class and days of supply, and it goes from a vanity number to a decision. ## How Stockful tracks it Stockful’s Sell-Through Rate report calculates it per SKU over the window you choose, from your Shopify sales and remaining stock, so you are comparing like with like instead of eyeballing lifetime figures. Sorted across your catalogue, it makes your fast movers and your dead weight obvious at a glance. Sell-through is simple maths, but only if you anchor it to a period and read it per product. Do that, and it becomes one of the most honest signals about which of your buying decisions actually worked. _Get started free at _[_stockful.app_](https://stockful.app)_. Stockful’s Sell-Through Rate report tracks every SKU over the window you choose._ **More from Stockful:** - New to the metric? Start with [Sell-Through Rate Explained](https://stockful.app/blog/sell-through-rate-shopify) - [How much cash is trapped on your shelves?](https://stockful.app/blog/overstock-cash-tied-up-shopify-inventory) - [How to use ABC analysis to prioritise your Shopify inventory](https://stockful.app/blog/abc-analysis-shopify-inventory) **Try Stockful on your Shopify store** Daily inventory history, forecasting, reports and an AI assistant. Free 14-day trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=blog&utm_content=article-cta) --- # Contact Stockful · Support, security and data requests URL: https://stockful.app/contact Contact # Contact Stockful One address, answered by the people who build the app. No ticket portal, no account required. ## Email us **[support@stockful.app](mailto:support@stockful.app)** reaches the Stockful team. We typically respond within one business day. You do not need an account, a login, or an active subscription to contact us - pre-sales questions are welcome on the same address. If something looks broken rather than confusing, check [status.stockful.app](https://status.stockful.app) first. It shows live and historical uptime, so you can tell an incident from a problem with your own setup before you write to us. ## What to include You will get a faster answer if your first message includes: - Your store domain, for example `your-store.myshopify.com` - What you expected to happen, and what happened instead - Where in the app it happened - the page name, or the report you ran - Roughly when it happened, including your timezone - A screenshot or screen recording if there is something visible on screen If you are reporting a problem with a Slack alert or a scheduled report, tell us the Slack workspace and channel name too, and roughly when the message should have arrived. ## Security disclosures Report security vulnerabilities and suspected incidents to [support@stockful.app](mailto:support@stockful.app). What happens next - triage, containment, notification timelines - is set out in our [security incident response policy](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/security-incident-response) . ## Data protection, GDPR and DPA requests Use the same address for data protection matters and we will route it to the right person. Our role as a processor, the sub-processors we use, and the security measures that apply are described in the [privacy policy](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/privacy-policy), the [data processing agreement](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/data-processing-agreement) and the [terms of service](https://docs.stockful.app/policies/terms-of-service). ## Billing Subscriptions and charges are handled by Shopify, so plan changes, invoices and cancellations happen in your Shopify admin under Settings → Apps and sales channels. If a charge looks wrong, email us and we will work it out with you. ## Registered address Stockful 20 Wenlock Road, London, England, N1 7GU, United Kingdom Post is not a support channel - it is here so you can verify who you are dealing with. For anything you need answered, email [support@stockful.app](mailto:support@stockful.app). ## Answer it yourself first A lot of common questions are already covered in writing: the [documentation](https://docs.stockful.app), the [frequently asked questions](https://stockful.app/faq), the [changelog](https://docs.stockful.app/changelog), and [developer resources](https://stockful.app/developers) for the MCP server, Shopify Flow and the storefront API. --- # Stockful developer resources · MCP server, Shopify Flow, storefront API URL: https://stockful.app/developers Developers # Stockful developer resources Every way to reach Stockful's data from outside the app: an MCP server, Shopify Flow, a storefront API, report webhooks, and a machine-readable copy of this site. ## When an agent should reach for Stockful Stockful answers questions about **one Shopify store's inventory**: what is low, what is overstocked, what to reorder and when, what stock is worth, how fast it is selling, and what is arriving. Reach for it when the question is about stock levels, sales velocity, demand forecasts, reorder timing, purchase orders, suppliers, landed cost, transfers between locations, or inventory anomalies for a store that has Stockful installed. It is not the right tool for storefront content, order fulfilment, customers, payments or theme code - those are Shopify's own APIs. Stockful also does not do raw-materials or bill-of-materials tracking, and it will not move stock in Shopify on your behalf. ## Stockful MCP server Stockful runs a remote **MCP (Model Context Protocol) server**, so Claude, Claude Code, Cursor, VS Code, Gemini CLI and ChatGPT can read a store's live inventory, forecasts and alerts, and act on them. It exposes the same data and tools that power the in-app AI assistant, and it is available on every plan. The endpoint is a **per-store connection URL you create in the app**, not a public address. In Stockful, go to **Settings → MCP server**, click **Create connection**, and copy the URL. It embeds a secret token in the path, is shown only once, and can be revoked at any time - treat it like a password and create a separate one per person or device. The URL looks like this: ``` https://mcp.stockful.app/YOUR_TOKEN ``` Because the token is in the URL, no separate API key or header is needed. Every tool is read-only or a change your client confirms first, and the connection is scoped to the single store the token was created for - it cannot see another store's data, and it cannot move stock in Shopify. Setup snippets for each client are in the [MCP server documentation](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/mcp-server). ## Shopify Flow triggers and actions Stockful ships **ten Shopify Flow triggers** that fire on inventory events, and **nine actions** - query actions that return inventory and forecast data mid-workflow, and write actions that update Stockful settings. See the [trigger reference](https://docs.stockful.app/flow/triggers), the [action reference](https://docs.stockful.app/flow/actions) and [worked example workflows](https://docs.stockful.app/flow/examples). ## Storefront data and the window.stockful API Stockful writes live inventory data to **eleven Shopify metafields** - seven at variant level, four at product level - readable from Liquid, the Shopify Storefront API and JavaScript. On top of them sits `window.stockful`, a JavaScript API for fetching live inventory with built-in caching from a bundle under 2 KB. - [Storefront data overview](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/overview) - [Metafield data reference](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/data-reference) - [window.stockful developer API](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/developer-api) - [Liquid and JavaScript code examples](https://docs.stockful.app/storefront/examples) ## StockfulQL **StockfulQL** is the query language behind every Stockful report, chart and scheduled export: `FROM`, `SHOW`, `WHERE`, `GROUP BY`, `TIMESERIES`, `HAVING`, `COMPARE TO` and the rest, over roughly twenty documented datasets covering inventory, sales, returns, purchasing, costs, receipts, supplier performance, reorder and transfer history, pricing and forecast accuracy. Start at the [StockfulQL overview](https://docs.stockful.app/stockfulql/overview), the [dataset reference](https://docs.stockful.app/stockfulql/datasets/overview) or the [query examples](https://docs.stockful.app/stockfulql/examples). ## Report webhooks and exports Any report can be scheduled and delivered to your own endpoint as JSON, with optional request signing - see the [webhook channel docs](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/reports/channels/webhook). Reports also export as CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL, or deliver to email, Slack, Google Sheets and Airtable. ## This site, machine-readable stockful.app is a static marketing site, and everything on it is available in a form an agent can read directly: - [/llms.txt](https://stockful.app/llms.txt) - the index of every page, with a “when to use Stockful” section written for agents. - [/llms-full.txt](https://stockful.app/llms-full.txt) - every English page concatenated as Markdown, in one fetch. - **Markdown content negotiation.** Send `Accept: text/markdown` to any page URL and you get Markdown back instead of HTML, with `Vary: Accept` set. Every page also has a stable `/index.md` sibling, advertised in a `Link: rel="alternate"` header. - [/openapi.json](https://stockful.app/openapi.json) - an OpenAPI 3.1 description of the site content API below, with an operationId, a description and typed response schemas on every operation. - [/api/v1/](https://stockful.app/api/v1/index.json) - a small read-only JSON API over this site's own content: pricing, FAQ, page index and blog posts. Errors come back as JSON with a code, a message and a hint. - [/sitemap-index.xml](https://stockful.app/sitemap-index.xml) and [/robots.txt](https://stockful.app/robots.txt). - [status.stockful.app](https://status.stockful.app) - live and historical uptime for the app, the API and the MCP server. - The documentation site publishes its own index at [docs.stockful.app/llms.txt](https://docs.stockful.app/llms.txt), and every docs page is available as Markdown by appending `.md` to its URL. The site content API describes _Stockful the product_ - pricing, features, documentation. It does not expose any merchant's store data. Live store data comes from the MCP server above, authenticated per store. ## Questions Email [support@stockful.app](mailto:support@stockful.app), or start from the [documentation](https://docs.stockful.app). --- # Frequently asked questions · Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/faq FAQ # Frequently asked questions Everything about getting started, Stocky, pricing and the features. For topic-specific detail, see the individual pages. ## Getting started ### What does Stockful do that Shopify doesn't? Shopify shows current stock levels but only keeps 180 days of adjustment history. It has no AI assistant, no health check, no Explain feature, no scheduled reporting, and no Slack alerts. Stockful adds an AI inventory assistant on top of daily snapshots at every location, 100+ reports, demand forecasting, native purchase orders and Slack alerts - up to 2 years of detailed daily data. ### Do I need to change how I manage inventory in Shopify? No. Stockful reads your existing Shopify inventory data in real-time via webhooks. It doesn't modify your stock levels, products, or orders. It's an analytics layer on top of what you already have. ### Is my data secure? All data is scoped to your shop using row-level security. Stockful uses Shopify's official authentication, encrypted connections, and isolated per-shop data tokens. Stockful never changes your stock levels, products, or orders - write access is used only to publish stock data to your storefront via metafields. ### What happens if I uninstall? Your data is retained for 48 hours after you uninstall the app. If you reinstall within that window, your historical data is still there. After 48 hours, data is permanently deleted. ## Stocky ### How do I track inventory history in Shopify? Shopify natively tracks only 180 days of inventory adjustment history. To track daily stock levels over time - broken down by location - you need an app like Stockful. It captures automatic daily snapshots so you can see trends, velocity, and sell-through rates going back up to 2 years. ### Is Stockful an alternative to Stocky? Yes. Stocky is being removed from Shopify on August 31, 2026, along with its API. Stockful replaces what you used Stocky for - daily inventory snapshots, per-location analytics, 100+ built-in reports and Slack alerts it never offered - and adds native purchase orders with suppliers, receiving and true landed cost. Its import wizard brings your Stocky suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments across. See our full comparison at https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative. ### How is Stockful different from inventory history apps? Most inventory history apps only track stock levels over time. Stockful combines historical tracking with 100+ built-in reports, Slack alerts, ABC analysis, demand forecasting, dead stock detection, and reorder recommendations - all in one app. Plans start at $19.99/month with a 14-day free trial. ### I make what I sell. Stocky never tracked my ingredients, does Stockful? Yes. Stocky had no bills of materials at all, so makers moving off it have been running their ingredients in a spreadsheet alongside it. Stockful holds materials such as flour, wax, fabric or packaging as their own catalogue with their own stock, cost, supplier and lead time, records what each product is made of, and runs production batches that consume material and write the finished goods back to Shopify. Reordering works out what to buy from your open batches and your sales forecast together. It is on every plan at no extra cost. There is no expiry dating or lot traceability. ## Pricing ### How much do the AI features cost? Nothing on top of your plan. Every plan ($19.99 Starter / $39.99 Growth / $79.99 Pro per month) includes the full set of AI features - assistant, health check, explain, anomaly detection, and the smart setup wizard. Each plan also includes a per-billing-cycle allowance of merchant-initiated AI interactions: 100 on Starter, 500 on Growth, 1,000 on Pro. Background AI work (anomaly hypotheses, weekly digest, smart setup analysis) doesn't count against your allowance. ### What are "tracked SKUs"? Tracked SKUs are variants that have inventory tracking enabled in Shopify and aren't excluded by your tracking rules. If you have 5,000 products but only 2,000 have tracking enabled, you're only using 2,000 tracked SKUs toward your plan limit. Each tracked SKU can have per-SKU overrides for lookback periods, lead times, and safety stock levels. ### What if I exceed my plan's SKU or location limits? You can add extra SKUs at $5 per 500 SKUs/month and extra locations at $5 per location/month. Overages are billed automatically so you never lose access to your data. You can also upgrade to a higher plan at any time. ## Features & AI ### Does Stockful use AI? Yes. Stockful includes an AI assistant you can chat with, a one-click health check that scans 5 dimensions of your shop and surfaces 25 specific findings, an Explain button on every metric, anomaly detection with one-sentence hypotheses, and a smart setup wizard. Every plan includes the full set of AI features, with a per-billing-cycle usage allowance sized to the plan. ### How does Stockful's forecasting work? Stockful fits five candidate models to every SKU at every location - a flat baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality, and an intermittent-demand model for slow or sporadic sellers - trained on up to 2 years of your Shopify sales history. Seasonal patterns like Christmas lines or BFCM spikes are learned per product, with no manual 'same period last year' setup. ### How accurate are Stockful's forecasts? Stockful grades its own forecasts. A richer model is adopted only when it beats the simple baseline on a backtest of that SKU's own history - so a forecast can never get worse by being fancier - and accuracy is re-measured continuously against actual sales. Safety stock is computed statistically from your chosen service level, accounting for both demand variability and supplier lead-time variability, rather than a flat buffer. ### Do I have to use the AI features? No. There's a master AI toggle in settings, and the opt-in subscriptions for weekly AI summaries and anomaly Slack alerts are off by default. Even with AI on, nothing is sent anywhere until you actually invoke an AI feature. ### How is my data used by the AI? When you use an AI feature, the relevant context from your shop is sent to our model provider for inference only - it is not used to train models. No data leaves your shop without an AI feature being invoked. Full details are in our privacy policy. ### How does per-location tracking work? During setup, you choose which locations to track. Stockful then captures inventory levels, sales data, and analytics for each variant at each location independently. You can compare locations, spot imbalances, and get transfer suggestions. ### Can I get reports delivered automatically? Yes. Any report, built-in or one you built yourself, can be scheduled for automatic delivery to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. Run history records every scheduled run, its outcome and who received it. You can also view any report live in the app. ### What is ABC analysis for Shopify inventory? ABC analysis categorises your products by revenue contribution: A items (top ~80% of revenue), B items (next ~15%), and C items (bottom ~5%). Stockful runs ABC analysis automatically across your Shopify inventory so you can focus replenishment efforts on the products that matter most. ### Can Stockful track raw materials if I make what I sell? Yes, on every plan. Materials such as flour, wax, fabric or packaging are held as their own catalogue with their own stock, unit of measure, cost, supplier and lead time, because Shopify only tracks the finished product. Bills of materials record what one unit takes and can be multi-level, so a cookie made of dough made of flour is followed all the way down. Production batches reserve material when they start and consume what was actually used when they close, writing the finished goods back to Shopify. There is no expiry dating or lot traceability. --- # Features · Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/features Features # One app for your whole inventory. Monitoring, history, purchasing, forecasting, analytics and an AI assistant, all in one Shopify app - with native purchase orders and true landed cost. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=features&utm_content=hero) ![Stockful features overview: inventory monitoring, forecasting, reports and the AI assistant](https://stockful.app/img/screenshots/hero.webp) The AI assistant ## Answers, not just dashboards. Every plan includes the assistant. Ask questions, run checks, and get plain-English explanations grounded in your live shop. Ask anything Health check Explain every metric Anomaly alerts Stockful assistant What should I reorder before the weekend? Three lines are close to stocking out at your current sell rate: Merino Crew - Charcoal / M 4 days Trail Sock - Black / L 6 days Insulated Bottle - 750ml 9 days Ask anything about your inventory… Monitoring & history ## Every day of your stock, kept. Up to a year of daily stock history backfilled at install, plus two years of sales history - then a snapshot every day at every location from there. ### Daily snapshots Per variant and per location, up to two years of daily history. ### OOS-aware velocity Sales speed that accounts for time out of stock, not just raw units sold. ### Stock valuation Live inventory value across every location, tracked over time. ### Raw materials & BOMs The stock Shopify cannot see: wax, flour, fabric, packaging. Held as their own catalogue, tied to what you sell through bills of materials, and consumed by production batches that write the finished goods back to Shopify. Reordering & alerts ## Never caught short. Know what to buy and when, and hear about problems before they cost you. ### Reorder recommendations Days-of-supply and suggested order quantities on every variant. ### Low-stock alerts Custom rules and reorder points, delivered to Slack. ### Transfer suggestions Move stock between locations before one runs dry while another sits heavy. ### Purchase orders Turn reorder recommendations into one draft order per supplier, or start from scratch. Send by branded PDF or email, receive with partial receipts, and let shipping and duties allocate across units for a true landed cost. Forecasting & analytics ## See what's coming. Forecasts that grade themselves, and the analytics to act on them. [How Stockful's forecasting works ›](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) ### Demand forecasting Five candidate models per SKU and location, trained on up to 2 years of sales. A richer model is adopted only when it beats the baseline on your own history. ### Seasonality & slow movers Christmas lines, summer lines and BFCM patterns learned per product, and a dedicated model for slow, sporadic sellers. ### ABC analysis Automatic classification so you focus on the SKUs that drive the value. ### Dead stock & sell-through Find the cash trapped on your shelves and the lines quietly ageing. Reports & integrations ## Fits how you already work. Scheduled reporting and the integrations to plug Stockful into your stack. ### 100+ built-in reports Run live on current data, or build your own and schedule it. ### Shopify Flow 10 triggers and 9 actions to automate around your inventory. ### Storefront data Bring storefront signals alongside your inventory for fuller context. ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=features&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Inventory Planner Alternative for Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative # The Best Inventory Planner Alternative for Shopify Inventory Planner by Sage does not publish a price for its main product and quotes on request. Stockful is an AI inventory assistant for Shopify - chat, one-click health check, explain on every metric, plus daily snapshots, 100+ reports, native purchase orders with suppliers and landed cost, and Slack alerts - from a published $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=inventory-planner-alternative&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Inventory Planner vs Stockful - feature comparison |   | Inventory Planner | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | AI chat assistant | No | Ask anything - grounded in your shop data | | One-click health check | No | Scans 5 dimensions, surfaces 25 findings | | Explain every metric | No | Plain-English explanations on every value | | Anomaly detection with hypotheses | No | Surfaces spikes and drops with likely causes | | Starting price | Quote only; Essentials $119.99/mo | From $19.99/mo (14-day free trial) | | Daily inventory snapshots | No | Yes, per variant, per location | | Inventory history | Limited | Up to 2 years of daily data | | Report library | 200+ metrics, no report library | 101 built in, plus your own | | Custom report builder | Saved column presets | Metrics, dimensions, filters, chart | | Query language | None | StockfulQL on any report | | Scheduled report delivery | Email only | Email, Slack, webhook, Sheets, Airtable | | Report exports | CSV | CSV, Excel, XML, JSONL; PDF for charts | | Slack alerts | No | Custom rules with reorder point alerts and auto-mute | | ABC analysis | No | Built-in, runs automatically | | Demand forecasting | Yes (core feature) | Five candidate models per SKU & location, adopted only when they beat a baseline backtest - accuracy tracked continuously | | Seasonal & slow-mover models | Seasonality supported | Seasonality learned per product, plus a dedicated intermittent-demand model for slow sellers | | Shopify Flow integration | No | 10 triggers and 9 actions | | Dead stock detection | No | Built-in | | Inventory health scores | No | Composite score per shop and location | | Purchase orders | Yes | Native purchase orders, one per supplier from your recommendations, with landed cost | | Multi-channel (Amazon, etc.) | Yes | Shopify-focused | | Setup time | ~4 weeks onboarding | Under 5 minutes | | Pricing transparency | Custom quote required | Published on website | | Free trial | 14 days on Essentials only | 14-day free trial, all features | ## What Stockful offers that Inventory Planner doesn't ### Daily inventory snapshots Inventory Planner doesn't capture daily stock-level snapshots. Stockful records every variant at every location, every day - giving you trends, velocity, sell-through rates, and days of supply going back up to 2 years. ### 100+ reports, or build your own Inventory Planner gives you a column picker over its metrics and saves the layout as a preset. Stockful gives you 100+ built-in reports plus a builder that writes a StockfulQL query you can edit, and schedules the result to Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable rather than email alone. ### Slack alerts with custom rules Inventory Planner has no Slack integration. Stockful lets you set thresholds per product, collection, or location. Get immediate alerts, daily digests, or weekly summaries - with quiet hours to suppress overnight noise. ### Health scores & multi-location balancing A composite health score combining out-of-stock rates, dead stock percentage, and sell-through. Compare locations side by side with automatic transfer suggestions. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### What's the difference between Stockful and Inventory Planner? Inventory Planner by Sage focuses on demand forecasting, purchase orders, and multi-channel sync (Amazon, WooCommerce, QuickBooks), priced on request. Stockful focuses on inventory visibility - daily snapshots, 100+ built-in reports, ABC analysis, Slack alerts, Shopify Flow integration, and health scores - starting at $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial. Stockful also includes self-tuning demand forecasting: five candidate models per SKU and location, seasonality learned per product, and accuracy tracked continuously. If you need PO generation across multiple sales channels, Inventory Planner may be a better fit. If you need affordable inventory tracking, reporting, and alerts for Shopify, Stockful is built for that. Stockful now also has native purchase orders: suppliers with full price lists, an order per supplier from your recommendations, sending by PDF or email, receiving with partial receipts, and true landed cost. ### Is Stockful cheaper than Inventory Planner? On published pricing, yes. Stockful starts at $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial, and every plan includes every feature - no feature gating, no hidden costs. Inventory Planner does not publish a price for its main product; you request a quote, and Sage says pricing is based on the volume of inventory you manage. The only figure Sage lists publicly is $119.99/mo for Inventory Planner Essentials, a single-warehouse, Shopify-only plan. ### Does Inventory Planner offer daily inventory snapshots? No. Inventory Planner focuses on demand forecasting and purchase orders. Stockful does both of those and captures what Inventory Planner doesn't: daily stock-level snapshots at each location, per variant, every day - giving you up to 2 years of historical data for trend analysis, velocity tracking, and sell-through rates. ### Can Stockful generate purchase orders? Yes. Stockful builds the order for you: reorder recommendations group into one draft per supplier, priced from that supplier's list, and you send it as a branded PDF or by email. Receive stock as it arrives with partial receipts, then let shipping, duties and fees allocate across units for a true landed cost that feeds your margins. The difference is breadth: Inventory Planner covers multi-channel PO management across Amazon and other channels, while Stockful's purchasing is built around Shopify and Shopify POS. ### Does Stockful work with Amazon or other channels? Stockful is built specifically for Shopify. It integrates deeply with the Shopify API and webhooks for real-time inventory tracking. If you need multi-channel inventory sync across Amazon, WooCommerce, or QuickBooks, Inventory Planner supports that. Stockful focuses on doing Shopify inventory analytics exceptionally well at a fraction of the cost. ### How long does it take to set up Stockful vs Inventory Planner? Stockful takes under 5 minutes to set up - install the app, choose your locations, and data starts syncing immediately. Inventory Planner typically requires a ~4 week onboarding process with guided setup and configuration. ### How does reporting compare to Inventory Planner? Inventory Planner turns your data into a large metric set you can pick columns from and save as a preset, and it emails reports on a schedule. Stockful ships 100+ built-in reports that run live, plus a builder where you choose metrics, dimensions, filters and a chart. Every report is also a StockfulQL query you can read and edit. The other difference is where a scheduled report can land: Inventory Planner delivers by email, while Stockful also delivers to Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=inventory-planner-alternative&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Prediko Alternative for Shopify - Flat Pricing | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative # The Prediko Alternative With Flat, Predictable Pricing Prediko's pricing is banded on your revenue, from $49/mo for stores under $100k GMV and rising as you grow, and raw materials and bills of materials are a $20/mo add-on on top. Stockful is priced on what you actually track: SKUs and locations, from a flat $19.99/mo with every feature on every plan. Self-tuning demand forecasting, native purchase orders, raw materials and production, daily snapshots, 100+ reports and an AI assistant, all included. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=prediko-alternative&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Prediko vs Stockful - feature comparison |   | Prediko | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Starting price | $49/mo under $100k GMV, banded upward on revenue | From $19.99/mo, flat tiers | | Pricing basis | Your last-12-months revenue (GMV) | Tracked SKUs and locations only | | Demand forecasting | AI sales forecasting | Five candidate models per SKU & location, adopted only when they beat a baseline backtest | | Forecast accuracy tracking | Pia flags forecasts needing revisiting | Every model backtested before adoption; accuracy re-measured continuously | | AI chat assistant | Yes - Pia, an AI inventory agent | Included on every plan - chat, one-click health check, explain on any metric | | Daily inventory snapshots | Not advertised | Per variant & location, up to 2 years | | Report library | 20+ templates (Prediko's claim) | 100+ built-in reports | | Custom report builder | Not yet shipped | Metrics, dimensions, filters, chart | | Query language | None | StockfulQL on any report | | Scheduled report delivery | Email, Slack, WhatsApp | Email, Slack, webhook, Sheets, Airtable | | Purchase orders | Yes - create, track & bulk edit | Native purchase orders, one per supplier from your recommendations, with landed cost | | Raw materials & BOMs | $20/mo plan add-on | Included on every plan, multi-level, with production batches | | WMS & 3PL integrations | 100+ integrations | Shopify-focused, plus Slack and Shopify Flow | | Shopify Flow integration | Not advertised | 10 triggers and 9 actions | ## Where Stockful differs ### Nothing priced on your revenue, nothing sold as an add-on Prediko's plans are banded on your last 12 months of sales, from $49/mo under $100k GMV and rising as you grow, with raw materials and bills of materials a $20/mo add-on on top of that. Stockful charges for what it tracks: SKUs and locations. A store doing $2M pays the same $19.99 to $79.99 as a store doing $50k, and raw materials, production, forecasting and AI are all on every plan. ### Forecasts that prove themselves, not a black box Stockful fits five candidate models to every SKU at every location and adopts a richer one only when it beats a simple baseline on a backtest of that SKU's own history. Accuracy is re-measured continuously - you can see how each forecast is doing rather than taking it on faith. ### Visibility, not just purchasing Daily snapshots of every variant at every location for up to 2 years, 100+ built-in reports, a builder for the ones nobody wrote, ABC analysis, dead stock detection, anomaly alerts and per-location health scores - the monitoring layer around the purchase orders you raise in the same app. ### AI on every plan, at every price Prediko's Pia and Stockful's assistant both talk to your inventory. The difference is the bill: Stockful's full AI feature set - chat, one-click health checks, plain-English explanations on every metric - is included from the $19.99 plan, priced by SKUs, not your revenue. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### What's the difference between Stockful and Prediko? Prediko centres on purchasing operations - AI sales forecasting feeding purchase orders, Pia (its AI inventory agent), and 100+ WMS integrations - with pricing banded on your revenue, from $49/mo under $100k GMV and rising as you grow, plus a $20/mo add-on for raw materials and bills of materials. Stockful centres on visibility and self-tuning forecasting: daily snapshots, 100+ reports, Slack alerts, ABC analysis and an AI assistant, priced flat from $19.99/mo by SKUs and locations. Stockful also has native purchase orders, and raw materials, bills of materials and production on every plan at no extra cost. ### Is Stockful cheaper than Prediko? For most stores, substantially. Prediko starts at $49/mo for stores under $100k in annual sales and rises with revenue through a series of GMV bands, with raw materials and bills of materials a $20/mo add-on on top. Stockful runs $19.99-$79.99/mo based on tracked SKUs and locations, regardless of how much you sell, with every feature on every plan and a 14-day free trial. ### How does the forecasting compare? Prediko describes its forecasting as AI-based, planning sales by product, SKU and season. Stockful's forecasting is statistical and self-grading: five candidate models per SKU and location (baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality, and an intermittent-demand model for slow sellers), each backtested against that SKU's own history before adoption, with accuracy tracked continuously. Seasonality is learned per product from up to 2 years of your Shopify sales history. ### Can Stockful create purchase orders like Prediko? Yes. Recommendations group into one draft order per supplier, priced from that supplier's price list, with pack size, minimum order quantity and lead time applied. Send it as a branded PDF or by email, receive with partial receipts, and let shipping, duties and fees allocate across units for a true landed cost. Raw materials go on the same orders as products and are received in one action. What Stockful doesn't do is 3PL/WMS integrations - that's Prediko's focus. Stockful's purchasing is built around Shopify and Shopify POS. ### How hard is it to switch? There's nothing to migrate. Install it, choose which locations to track, and it backfills up to a year of daily stock history and two years of sales history from Shopify immediately, then snapshots daily from there. You can run it alongside Prediko during your trial and compare the recommendations on your own data. ### How does reporting compare to Prediko? Prediko advertises 20+ report templates with filters, and its own help centre says custom reports are still to come. Stockful ships 100+ built-in reports today and lets you build your own from metrics and dimensions, with the underlying StockfulQL query editable on any report. Both schedule reports out: Prediko to email, Slack and WhatsApp, Stockful to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. ### Does Stockful handle raw materials and bills of materials? Yes, on every plan at no extra cost, where Prediko sells raw materials forecasting and BOMs as a $20/mo add-on on top of a revenue-banded subscription. Materials are held as their own catalogue with their own stock, unit of measure, cost, supplier and lead time. Bills of materials can be multi-level, so a cookie made of dough made of flour is followed all the way down, and dough you already hold reduces the flour you are told to buy. Production batches reserve material when they start and consume what was actually used when they close. There is no expiry dating or lot traceability. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=prediko-alternative&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Pricing · Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/pricing Pricing # Simple, transparent pricing. Every feature on every plan. You only pay for the SKUs and locations you track, with a 14-day free trial. ★ **5.0** on the Shopify App Store Pricing ## Every feature on every plan. Plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. No feature gating, AI included, 14-day free trial. ### Included on every plan AI, forecasting, purchasing, analytics and alerts on all tiers. AI usage allowance scales with the plan you choose. - AI assistant, health check, explain - Anomaly detection with likely causes - Self-tuning, seasonality-aware forecasts - Purchase orders with suppliers and price lists - Landed cost, multi-currency and receiving - Up to 2 years of daily history - Scheduled reports and Slack alerts - Storefront data and Flow integration - Raw materials, BOMs and production Starter For stores ready to scale $19.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 2,000 tracked SKUs - 1 location [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=pricing&utm_content=pricing-starter) Growth Most popular For growing stores with multiple locations $39.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 7,500 tracked SKUs - Up to 5 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=pricing&utm_content=pricing-growth) Pro For large stores with advanced needs $79.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 15,000 tracked SKUs - Up to 10 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=pricing&utm_content=pricing-pro) ## How the limits work Plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. Go over and you're charged a simple, predictable overage. ### Tracked SKUs 1 SKU = 1 variant Every variant you actively monitor counts once. Each plan includes a base SKU allowance. ### Extra SKUs $5 / 500 Over your allowance it's $5 per 500 additional SKUs, totalled as a snapshot at the end of your billing cycle. ### Extra locations $5 / location Need more locations than your plan includes? Each additional location is $5 per month. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I get all features on every plan? Yes. AI, forecasting, purchasing, analytics, reports and alerts are on every tier - including native purchase orders with suppliers, price lists, receiving and landed cost. Plans differ only by how many SKUs and locations you can track, and your AI usage allowance scales with the plan. ### What counts as a tracked SKU? Each variant you actively monitor counts as one SKU. If you go over your plan's allowance it's $5 per 500 additional SKUs, totalled as a snapshot at the end of your billing cycle. ### How does the 14-day free trial work? You get full access for 14 days. Stockful backfills up to a year of daily stock history and two years of sales history the moment you install, so reports and forecasts are running on your real data on day one rather than at the end of the trial. ### Can I change plan or cancel later? Yes. Move up or down a tier or cancel anytime from the Shopify admin. Billing runs through Shopify, so it appears on your regular Shopify invoice. ### What happens if I add another location? Each location beyond your plan's included count is $5 per month. Like SKU overage, it's charged as an end-of-cycle snapshot so there are no surprises mid-month. ## Try every feature free for 14 days. Pick a plan when you're ready. Change tier or cancel anytime. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=pricing&utm_content=bottom-cta) 14-day free trial --- # ABC Analysis for Shopify Inventory | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis # Automatic ABC Analysis for Your Shopify Inventory Stop guessing which products matter most. Stockful runs ABC analysis automatically on your Shopify inventory - classifying products by revenue contribution so you can focus replenishment, marketing, and warehouse space on the items that drive your business. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-abc-analysis&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Manual ABC analysis vs Stockful - side by side |   | Manual / Spreadsheets | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Classification method | Manual export and calculation | Automatic, based on live sales data | | Update frequency | Whenever you remember | Runs automatically on schedule | | Per-location breakdown | Extremely tedious | Built-in per-location ABC | | Reorder recommendations | Manual calculation | Automatic based on OOS-aware velocity, lead times, and safety stock | | Dead stock detection | Manual review | Built-in, flagged automatically | | Revenue threshold config | Manual setup | Configurable A/B/C thresholds | | Demand forecasting | Not practical | Self-tuning models that track their own forecast accuracy | | Report delivery | Manual share | Scheduled to any of five channels | | Integration with alerts | None | Low stock alerts for A items prioritised | | Time to first result | Hours of work | Under 5 minutes setup | ## ABC analysis that runs itself - plus 13 more reports ### Automatic classification by revenue Stockful classifies your products into A (top ~80% revenue), B (next ~15%), and C (bottom ~5%) - automatically, based on your actual sales data. No spreadsheets, no formulas, no manual exports. ### 13 more report types included ABC analysis is one of over 100 built-in reports. You also get Low Stock, Out of Stock, Lost to Stockouts, Overstocked, Clearance Recommendations, Dead Stock, Zero Sales, Inventory Valuation, Reorder Recommendations, Location Comparison, Transfer Suggestions, Profit/COGS and Sell-Through Rate - plus a builder for anything the library doesn't already cover. ### Prioritise alerts for your A items Combine ABC analysis with Slack alerts. Set tighter thresholds for A items so you're always notified when your highest-revenue products are running low - while keeping C item alerts less aggressive. ### Spot dead stock before it costs you ABC analysis works hand-in-hand with dead stock detection. Products classified as C items with no recent sales are flagged immediately - helping you free up capital and warehouse space. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### What is ABC analysis? ABC analysis is an inventory classification method that groups products by revenue contribution. A items are your top performers (typically ~80% of revenue from ~20% of products). B items contribute the next ~15%, and C items the bottom ~5%. It helps you prioritise which products to restock, promote, and monitor most closely. ### How does Stockful calculate ABC classifications? Stockful analyses your Shopify sales data to rank products by revenue contribution. It then automatically assigns A, B, or C classifications based on configurable thresholds. The classification updates regularly so it always reflects your current sales patterns. ### Can I customise the A/B/C thresholds? Yes. The default thresholds are 80/15/5 (A items = top 80% revenue, B = next 15%, C = bottom 5%), but you can adjust these to match your business needs. ### Does ABC analysis work per location? Yes. Stockful can run ABC analysis for each location independently, since sales patterns often vary between warehouses, retail stores, and fulfillment centers. A product might be an A item at your flagship store but a C item at a secondary location. ### How often does the ABC classification update? ABC classifications update automatically based on your configured schedule. As your sales data changes, products may move between categories - a seasonal item might be an A item in winter and a C item in summer. ### Does Shopify have built-in ABC analysis? No. Shopify does not offer ABC analysis. To classify your inventory by revenue contribution, you'd need to export data to a spreadsheet and do it manually - or use an app like Stockful that automates it. ### How does ABC analysis connect to reorder recommendations? Stockful combines ABC classification with OOS-aware velocity, lead times, and safety stock levels to generate reorder recommendations. A items get prioritised - you'll see recommendations to restock them earlier and in larger quantities than B or C items. Lead times feed directly into the reorder calculation so recommendations account for actual delivery timelines. ### Is ABC analysis included on all plans? Yes. ABC analysis and the full report library are included on every Stockful plan. There's no feature gating - every plan gets every feature. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-abc-analysis&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Demand Forecasting - Per-SKU Models | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting # Demand Forecasting for Shopify, Tuned to Every Product Stockful fits five candidate models to every SKU at every location and adopts a richer one only when it beats a simple baseline on your own sales history. Seasonality learned per product, slow movers handled, up to 2 years of Shopify history - from $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-demand-forecasting&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Manual forecasting vs Stockful - side by side |   | Manual / Spreadsheets | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Seasonality | Guessed by hand from last year | Learned per product - Christmas, summer, BFCM | | Slow-moving SKUs | Noisy averages from sparse sales | Dedicated intermittent-demand model | | Sales history used | Usually 30-90 days | Up to 2 years, pulled from Shopify | | Model choice | One formula for every product | Five candidates per SKU & location, best adopted only if it beats the baseline | | Forecast accuracy | Unknown | Backtested before adoption, re-measured continuously | | Out-of-stock days | Drag the sales rate down | Excluded from velocity; lost sales quantified | | Safety stock | Flat rule-of-thumb buffer | Statistical, from your service level, demand and lead-time variability | | Reorder quantities | Gut feel | Tethered to observed sales, including the same season last year | ## Forecasting that proves itself on your own history ### Five models, chosen per SKU Every SKU at every location gets its own model, chosen from five candidates: flat baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality, and intermittent demand. A richer model is adopted only when it beats the baseline on a backtest of that SKU's own history - so the forecast can never get worse by being fancier. ### Seasonality, learned per product Christmas lines, summer lines, BFCM patterns - each product's seasonal shape is learned from up to 2 years of your sales history. No manual 'same period last year' fiddling. ### A dedicated model for slow movers Slow and sporadic sellers are where naive forecasting is worst - a few random sales swing the average wildly. Stockful gives them a dedicated intermittent-demand model instead. ### Out-of-stock aware velocity Days you couldn't sell don't drag your sales rate down. Stockful excludes out-of-stock periods from velocity and quantifies the sales you lost to stockouts. ### Statistical safety stock Buffers are computed from your chosen service level and your actual demand variability - and they account for supplier lead-time variability too, so flaky suppliers earn bigger buffers. ### Confidence bands, grounded reorder points Charts show the forecast with its confidence band and your reorder point. Suggested reorder quantities are tethered to real observed sales - including the same season last year - never model speculation. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How does Stockful's demand forecasting work? Stockful fits five candidate models to every SKU at every location: a flat baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality, and an intermittent-demand model for slow sellers. Each model is backtested against that SKU's own sales history, and a richer model is adopted only when it beats the simple baseline - so a forecast never gets worse by being fancier. Accuracy is then re-measured continuously against actual sales. ### How much sales history does it need? It works from day one - Stockful pulls up to 2 years of your existing sales history from Shopify when you install, so forecasts don't start from zero. Products with longer history get richer models: annual seasonality, for example, needs enough history to see the pattern. As history accrues, forecasts deepen automatically. ### Does it handle seasonal products? Yes. Seasonality is learned per product from your own sales history - Christmas lines, summer lines and BFCM spikes each get their own learned pattern. There's no manual 'same period last year' setup, and reorder suggestions take the same season last year into account. ### What about slow-moving SKUs? Slow and sporadic sellers get a dedicated intermittent-demand model instead of a noisy average. These are the SKUs where naive forecasting is worst - a couple of random sales can double a simple average - so they're modelled separately. ### Do I need to configure anything? No. Forecasting is self-tuning: models are selected, backtested and adopted per SKU automatically. Settings are available if you want them - supplier lead time, service level, and lookback period can all be adjusted, including per-SKU overrides. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-demand-forecasting&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Inventory Management App - Track & Report | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management # Smarter Inventory Management for Shopify Shopify shows current stock - but not the full picture. Stockful adds daily inventory snapshots, per-location analytics, 100+ reports, and Slack alerts so you can make better restocking, transfer, and purchasing decisions. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-management&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Shopify Native vs Stockful - what you're missing |   | Shopify Native | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Inventory history | 180 days of adjustments | Daily snapshots up to 2 years | | Reports | Basic inventory reports | 100+ reports with scheduled delivery | | ABC analysis | Not available | Built-in, runs automatically | | Demand forecasting | Not available | Self-tuning models that track their own forecast accuracy | | Purchase orders | Native, entered manually | Native purchase orders, one per supplier from your recommendations, with landed cost | | Slack alerts | Not available | Custom rules with reorder point alerts and auto-mute | | Per-location analytics | Limited | Full per-location breakdown and comparison | | Scheduled report delivery | Not available | Daily, weekly or monthly to five channels | | Dead stock detection | Not available | Built-in | | Inventory health scores | Not available | Composite score per shop and location | | Shopify Flow | Not available | 10 triggers and 9 actions for inventory automation | ## What Stockful adds to your Shopify inventory workflow ### Daily inventory snapshots Shopify only keeps 180 days of adjustment history. Stockful captures daily snapshots at every location - giving you trends, velocity, sell-through rates, and days of supply going back up to 2 years. ### 100+ reports, scheduled delivery Inventory Summary, Low Stock, Dead Stock, ABC Analysis, Reorder Recommendations and the rest of the 100+ library - delivered daily, weekly or monthly to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. ### Slack alerts with custom rules Set thresholds per product, collection, or location. Get immediate alerts, daily digests, or weekly summaries - with quiet hours to suppress overnight noise. ### Health scores & multi-location balancing A composite health score combining out-of-stock rates, dead stock percentage, and sell-through. Compare locations side by side with automatic transfer suggestions. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### What does Stockful do that Shopify doesn't? Shopify shows current stock levels but only keeps 180 days of adjustment history. Stockful captures daily inventory snapshots at every location, giving you trends, velocity data, sell-through rates, and forecasting - up to 2 years of detailed daily data. ### Do I need to change how I manage inventory in Shopify? No. Stockful reads your existing Shopify inventory data in real-time via webhooks. It doesn't modify your stock levels, products, or orders. It's an analytics layer on top of what you already have. ### How does per-location tracking work? During setup, you choose which locations to track. Stockful then captures inventory levels, sales data, and analytics for each variant at each location independently. You can compare locations, spot imbalances, and get transfer suggestions. ### What reports does Stockful include? Stockful includes over 100 built-in report types, among them Low Stock, Out of Stock, Lost to Stockouts, Overstocked, Clearance Recommendations, Dead Stock, Zero Sales, Inventory Valuation, Reorder Recommendations, ABC Analysis, Location Comparison, Transfer Suggestions, Profit/COGS and Sell-Through Rate. If the report you want isn't there you can build it, and any report can be viewed live in the app or scheduled for automatic delivery. ### Can Stockful help with purchase orders? Yes. Stockful has native purchase orders. Reorder recommendations group into one draft order per supplier, or you can start an order from scratch. Suppliers carry full price lists - supplier SKU, cost, pack size, minimum order quantity and lead time - and you send the order as a branded PDF or by email, receive stock as it arrives with partial receipts, and let shipping and duties allocate across units for a true landed cost. ### How do inventory alerts work? You set up alert rules with custom thresholds, scoped to specific products, collections, or locations. Stockful sends Slack alerts immediately, as daily digests, or as weekly summaries. You also get reorder point alerts when stock hits your reorder threshold, per-variant alert rules, and auto-mute that suppresses alerts until stock is restocked. ### What is ABC analysis for Shopify inventory? ABC analysis categorises your products by revenue contribution: A items (top ~80% of revenue), B items (next ~15%), and C items (bottom ~5%). Stockful runs ABC analysis automatically across your Shopify inventory so you can focus replenishment efforts on the products that matter most. ### How much does Stockful cost? Stockful plans start at $19.99/month for up to 2,000 tracked SKUs, with a 14-day free trial. All features are included on every plan - no feature gating. ### How long does setup take? Under 5 minutes. Install the app, connect your Shopify store and choose which locations to track. Stockful backfills up to a year of daily inventory history and two years of sales history straight away, then captures a snapshot every day from there. No manual configuration needed. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-management&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Inventory Reports - 100+ Report Types | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports # 100+ Inventory Reports for Shopify - Or Build Your Own Shopify's built-in reports barely scratch the surface. Stockful gives you over 100 inventory reports that run live against your current data, a builder for the question nobody wrote a report for, and scheduled delivery to five channels. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-reports&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ![The Stockful report builder: a valid StockfulQL query reading FROM inventory, SHOW inventory_value, TIMESERIES month, plotted as cost value against retail value over twelve months, with the metrics, dimensions, visualisation and filter controls alongside](https://stockful.app/img/screenshots/report-builder.webp) ## Shopify reporting vs Stockful - side by side |   | Shopify Native | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Number of reports | Basic inventory reports | 100+ built in | | Build your own report | Fixed set only | Metrics, dimensions, chart type | | Query language | ShopifyQL, for sales analytics | StockfulQL, for inventory data | | ABC analysis | Not available | Built-in, automatic classification | | Dead stock detection | Not available | Built-in with configurable thresholds | | Reorder recommendations | Not available | Based on velocity and lead times | | Inventory valuation | Basic cost tracking | Full valuation report with COGS | | Location comparison | Not available | Side-by-side per-location analytics | | Transfer suggestions | Not available | Automatic balancing recommendations | | Scheduled delivery | Not available | Email, Slack, webhook, Sheets, Airtable | | Export formats | CSV | CSV, Excel, XML, JSONL | | Run history | Not available | Every run, outcome and recipients | | Low stock & overstock | Basic alerts only | Detailed reports with custom thresholds | ## A library, a builder, and a way to deliver both ### 100+ reports, no generate step Every report runs live against your current data, on top of daily inventory snapshots captured at every location. Low Stock, Dead Stock, ABC Analysis, Inventory Valuation, Reorder Recommendations and the rest are one click away. ### Build the report nobody wrote Reports > New exploration. Pick your metrics and dimensions, set a date range and a comparison, choose how to chart it, and save it as your own report alongside the built-in ones. ### The same report, as a query Underneath the builder, your exploration also appears as an editable StockfulQL query. Edit the query and the report follows, so the controls are a starting point rather than a ceiling. ### Delivered to five channels Put any report on a daily, weekly or monthly schedule and have it arrive by email, in Slack, on a webhook, or written straight into Google Sheets or Airtable. ### Exports that fit the next tool Take the table out as CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL. PDF export covers the visualisations, so a chart you built lands in the deck still looking like a chart. ### Run history for every schedule Every scheduled run is recorded with its outcome and who it reached, so you can tell a report nobody read from a report that never arrived. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How many inventory reports does Stockful include? Over 100 built-in reports, all running live against your current data with no generate step. They cover the ground you would expect - Low Stock, Out of Stock, Lost to Stockouts, Overstocked, Clearance Recommendations, Dead Stock, Zero Sales, Inventory Valuation, Reorder Recommendations, ABC Analysis, Location Comparison, Transfer Suggestions, Profit/COGS and Sell-Through Rate among them - and if the one you want isn't there, you can build it. ### Can I build my own report? Yes. Go to Reports > New exploration, choose the metrics and dimensions you care about, set a date range and a comparison, and pick a chart type. Save it and it sits alongside the built-in reports, ready to schedule and export like any other. ### What is StockfulQL? StockfulQL is the query behind every exploration. Whatever you assemble with the builder's controls also appears underneath as an editable query, so you can adjust it directly when the controls don't go far enough. Change the query and the report changes with it. ### Can I schedule reports for automatic delivery? Yes. Any report, built-in or one you built yourself, can be put on a daily, weekly or monthly schedule and delivered automatically to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. You pick the time of day, and runs use your store's timezone. ### Can reports be delivered to Google Sheets or Airtable? Yes, as report schedules. Google Sheets and Airtable are delivery channels for scheduled reports, so a sheet can refresh itself on your cadence instead of being rebuilt by hand. Stock alerts are a separate thing and go to Slack or email only. ### What formats can I export reports in? Tabular exports come out as CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL, and you choose whether to take the rows on screen or the full result set behind them. Reports built around a chart can also be exported or delivered as a one-page PDF with the chart rendered. A plain table has no PDF version, since a PDF of a spreadsheet helps nobody. ### How do I know a scheduled report actually went out? Run history records every run: when it happened, which schedule and report it was, which channel it went to, whether you or the schedule started it, how long it took, how many rows it held, and the recipient list exactly as it stood at the time. Outcomes are Delivered, Nothing to report, Not delivered, or In progress - so an empty Low Stock report reads as good news rather than a broken schedule. ### How is the ABC analysis report calculated? Stockful's ABC analysis classifies your products by revenue contribution: A items generate the top ~80% of revenue, B items the next ~15%, and C items the bottom ~5%. The classification runs automatically based on your sales data and updates regularly. ### What does the Dead Stock report show? The Dead Stock report identifies products with inventory on hand but no sales over a configurable period. It helps you spot capital tied up in products that aren't moving, so you can discount, bundle, or liquidate them. ### Do reports work with multiple locations? Yes. Every report can be filtered by location, and location is available as a dimension when you build your own. The Location Comparison report compares stock levels, velocity, and sell-through across all your locations side by side, and Transfer Suggestions uses that data to recommend stock moves between them. ### Are all reports available on every plan? Yes. The full report library, the report builder, scheduled delivery to all five channels, exports and run history are included on every Stockful plan, starting at $19.99/month. There's no feature gating. ### Does Shopify have built-in inventory reports? Shopify provides basic inventory reports (current stock levels, adjustment history). But it doesn't offer ABC analysis, dead stock detection, reorder recommendations, location comparison, transfer suggestions, or scheduled report delivery. These are the gaps Stockful fills. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-reports&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Inventory Tracking - Daily Snapshots | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking # Track Your Shopify Inventory History - By Location, Over Time Shopify only keeps 180 days of adjustment history. Stockful captures daily inventory snapshots at every location, giving you trends, velocity, sell-through rates, and days of supply - up to 2 years of detailed daily data. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-tracking&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Shopify's inventory tracking vs Stockful |   | Shopify Native | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Inventory history | 180 days of adjustments only | Daily snapshots up to 2 years | | Data granularity | Adjustment events | Daily stock levels per variant, per location with per-SKU configurable settings | | Sell-through rate | Not tracked | Calculated automatically from snapshots | | Inventory velocity | Not tracked | Built-in per variant and location | | Days of supply | Not available | Calculated with demand forecasting | | Trend visualisation | No charts | Interactive history charts per variant | | Out-of-stock history | Not tracked | Full OOS timeline per variant | | Per-location breakdown | Basic current stock | Full historical tracking per location | | Data retention | 180 days | Up to 2 years detailed, unlimited trends | ## What Stockful tracks that Shopify doesn't ### Daily inventory snapshots at every location Stockful captures a snapshot of every variant at every location, every day. See exactly how stock levels changed over time - not just the adjustments, but the actual quantities on hand. ### Turn history into actionable reports Your inventory history powers 100+ reports: sell-through analysis, dead stock detection, reorder recommendations, and more. Schedule them for automatic delivery to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. ### Alerts based on real trends, not just thresholds Stockful combines historical data with real-time webhooks. Get Slack alerts when stock drops below your thresholds - scoped by product, collection, or location, with quiet hours built in. ### Inventory health scores powered by history Stockful uses your historical data to calculate a composite health score per shop and per location - combining out-of-stock rates, dead stock percentage, and sell-through to give you one number that tells the full story. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How does Stockful track inventory history? Stockful captures a daily snapshot of every tracked variant at every location. It also listens to real-time Shopify webhooks for inventory adjustments. Together, this gives you a complete picture of stock levels over time - not just what changed, but the actual quantities on hand each day. ### How far back does Stockful track inventory? Stockful keeps 2 years of daily snapshots on every plan. After 2 years, daily data automatically rolls up into weekly and monthly summaries that are kept indefinitely. Shopify natively only keeps 180 days of adjustment history with no daily stock-level tracking. ### What data does Stockful capture in each snapshot? Each daily snapshot records the quantity on hand for every tracked variant at every tracked location. From these snapshots, Stockful calculates sell-through rates, inventory velocity, days of supply, and out-of-stock history automatically. ### Does Stockful modify my Shopify inventory? No. Stockful captures data from your Shopify store via the official API and webhooks but never modifies stock levels, products, or orders. ### Can I track inventory at specific locations only? Yes. During setup, you choose which locations to track. Stockful captures data independently for each selected location, so you can track just your warehouse, just your retail stores, or everything. ### What's the difference between Stockful and Shopify's inventory history? Shopify tracks inventory adjustments (the changes) for 180 days. Stockful tracks actual stock levels (the quantities on hand) daily, giving you a complete picture of your inventory over time. This enables trend analysis, velocity tracking, sell-through rates, and forecasting that Shopify can't provide. ### Can I export my inventory history? Yes. Any report can be exported as CSV, Excel, XML or JSONL, and PDF export covers the visualisations. You can also put a report on a schedule and have it delivered automatically to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable, or view it live in the app. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-inventory-tracking&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Multi-Location Inventory Tracking | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory # Multi-Location Inventory Analytics for Shopify Shopify tells you how much stock is at each location right now. Stockful shows you how it's changing - with per-location snapshots, side-by-side comparison, transfer suggestions, and health scores across every warehouse, retail store, and fulfillment center. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-multi-location-inventory&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Shopify multi-location inventory vs Stockful |   | Shopify Native | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Per-location stock levels | Current quantities only | Daily snapshots with full history | | Location comparison | Not available | Side-by-side analytics across all locations | | Transfer suggestions | Not available | Automatic recommendations to balance stock | | Per-location velocity | Not tracked | Sell-through rate and velocity per location | | Location health scores | Not available | Composite health score per location | | Per-location reports | Basic | Every report filterable by location | | Stock imbalance detection | Not available | Automatic alerts when locations are unbalanced | | Per-location history | 180 days of adjustments | Daily snapshots up to 2 years per location | | Days of supply by location | Not available | Calculated per variant, per location | | Location count | Up to 200 in Shopify | Up to 10 tracked locations in Stockful | ## Inventory analytics built for multi-location Shopify merchants ### Per-location inventory snapshots, every day Stockful captures daily snapshots of every variant at every tracked location. See exactly how stock is moving at each warehouse, retail store, or fulfillment center - independently. ### Compare locations side by side The Location Comparison report puts all your locations next to each other - showing stock levels, velocity, sell-through, and days of supply. Quickly spot which locations are overstocked and which are running low. ### Alerts scoped to specific locations Set up Slack alerts with rules scoped to individual locations. Get notified when your warehouse runs low on a fast-seller, even if your retail store still has stock. Each location can have its own thresholds. ### Transfer suggestions to balance your stock Stockful analyses stock levels and velocity across your locations to recommend specific transfers. Move overstock from slow locations to fast-selling ones - before you lose sales or tie up more capital. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How many locations can Stockful track? Depending on your plan: 1 location on Starter, up to 5 on Growth, and up to 10 on Pro. Each location gets independent snapshots, analytics, and reports. You can also add extra locations at $5/location/month. ### How do transfer suggestions work? Stockful analyses inventory levels, velocity, and days of supply across your locations. When one location has excess stock that another location needs, Stockful recommends a specific transfer - telling you which variants to move, how many units, and between which locations. ### Can I compare all my locations side by side? Yes. The Location Comparison report shows stock levels, sell-through rates, velocity, and days of supply for every tracked location in a single view. You can spot imbalances instantly and drill into specific variants. ### Do alerts work per-location? Yes. Every alert rule can be scoped to specific locations. You can set different thresholds for your warehouse vs your retail stores, and get notified about specific locations without being overwhelmed by noise from others. ### Does Stockful track each location independently? Yes. Stockful captures inventory levels, sales data, and analytics for each variant at each location independently. This means you get per-location sell-through rates, velocity, days of supply, and health scores - not just aggregated totals. ### What if I only have one location? Stockful works great with a single location too. The Starter plan includes 1 location with the full report library, scheduled delivery, Slack alerts, and full inventory tracking. Growth supports up to 5 locations and Pro up to 10. ### Does Stockful modify stock at my locations? No. Stockful analyses your inventory data but never modifies stock levels, creates transfers, or adjusts quantities. You execute transfers through Shopify's admin - Stockful tells you what to move. ### How does the health score work per location? Each location gets its own composite health score combining out-of-stock rate, dead stock percentage, and sell-through. This lets you see at a glance which locations are healthy and which need attention - without reading through individual reports. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-multi-location-inventory&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Shopify Purchase Orders, Suppliers & Landed Cost | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders # Purchase Orders for Shopify, Built Into Stockful Purchase orders that end in a number you can trust. Build an order per supplier, send it as a branded PDF or straight to their inbox, receive it as it actually arrives, and let shipping and duties settle onto every unit for a true landed cost that feeds your margins. Your reorder recommendations can start the order for you. From $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-purchase-orders&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ![A partially received Stockful purchase order: accepted and rejected quantities per line, supplier SKUs, and a cost summary where shipping and customs duties land in the order total](https://stockful.app/img/screenshots/purchase-orders.webp) ## Manual PO entry vs Stockful - side by side |   | Manual PO entry | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | What to reorder | Guessed or worked out by hand | Reorder recommendations tethered to real observed sales | | Quantities & unit costs | Typed in by hand | Pre-filled from the supplier's price list | | Choosing items | One at a time | Single item or bulk-select, grouped by supplier | | Suppliers | Kept in a spreadsheet | Supplier SKU, cost, pack size, MOQ and lead time | | Sending the order | Copied into an email by hand | Branded PDF, packing slips, or email to the supplier | | Receiving | Ticked off on paper | In transit, accept or reject, partial receipts, then close | | True cost | Shipping and duties ignored | Shipping, duties and fees allocated across units | ## Purchasing, from order to true cost ### Know what it actually cost Shipping, duties and fees allocate across the units on the order, so each item carries its real landed cost. That figure feeds your average cost and margin reporting, and can sync back to Shopify's cost per item so both agree. ### One order per supplier Start from scratch, or let your reorder recommendations group automatically into a draft for each supplier. Quantities and costs come from that supplier's price list, with pack size, minimum order quantity and minimum order value applied. ### Send it however you work Export a branded PDF, print packing slips, or email the order straight to your supplier. Buy in their currency when you need to, and track payments against the order. ### Receive as it actually arrives Deliveries rarely turn up in one clean piece. Log shipments in transit, accept or reject what arrives, take partial receipts, then close - and cancel, duplicate or archive an order when plans change. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How does Stockful create a purchase order? From your reorder recommendations, or from scratch. Recommendations group automatically into one draft order per supplier, with quantities and costs pulled from that supplier's price list. You review the lines and send it - the order is created, sent, received and closed inside Stockful. ### Does it work with Shopify inventory and POS? Yes. Purchase orders work alongside Shopify inventory and Shopify POS. Landed cost can optionally sync back to Shopify's cost per item, so your margins agree in both places. ### How are items matched to my products? By SKU or barcode, and by the supplier SKU held on each supplier's price list - so the right variant is ordered at the right cost even when your supplier uses their own codes. ### Do I set up suppliers in Stockful? Yes. Suppliers live in Stockful with full price lists: supplier SKU, cost, pack size, minimum order quantity, lead time, primary supplier and minimum order value. The order is priced correctly as you build it. ### Can I see what a delivery really cost? Yes. Add shipping, duties and fees to the order and Stockful allocates them across units for a true landed cost, which feeds your average cost and margins. Orders can be placed in the supplier's currency, and you can track payments, tags, and cancel, duplicate or archive an order. ### How much does it cost? Stockful starts at $19.99/mo for up to 2,000 tracked SKUs, with a 14-day free trial. Every feature is on every plan, including reorder recommendations, suppliers and purchase orders. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-purchase-orders&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Raw Materials, BOMs & Production for Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials # Track the Raw Materials Behind What You Sell Shopify tracks the candle. It does not track the wax. If you make what you sell, your ingredients are invisible to every inventory tool you have tried, because those tools only understand Shopify products. Stockful holds materials as their own catalogue, with their own stock, costs and suppliers, links them to your products through bills of materials, and runs production batches that consume material and write the finished goods back to Shopify. Included on every plan, from $19.99/mo with a 14-day free trial. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-raw-materials&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Shopify on its own vs Stockful - side by side |   | Shopify on its own | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Materials you buy and consume | Not tracked. Flour and wax are not products | Their own catalogue, stocked in kilograms, metres, litres or count | | What a product is made of | Nowhere to record it | Bills of materials, with quantities per unit made | | Making a batch | A stock adjustment typed in afterwards | Start a batch to reserve material, close it to consume what it actually took | | Materials made from other materials | Not possible | Multi-level. Dough you already hold reduces the flour you are told to buy | | Knowing what to buy | Guesswork, or a spreadsheet | Reorder materials from open batches and your sales forecast, over each material's own lead time | | Buying materials | A separate order, kept off system | On the same purchase order as products, received in one action | | Planned against actual | Invisible | Yield variance on every closed batch, with a report that sorts by the worst | | Reporting on materials | None | Six built-in reports and three queryable datasets | ## From ingredient to finished product ### Materials as their own catalogue Wax, flour, fabric, thread, packaging. Each material carries its unit of measure, unit cost, supplier, lead time, minimum order and pack size. Shopify holds no quantity for any of it, so Stockful is the only record: open a SKU, use Count stock to enter what is actually on the shelf, and the difference is written to the ledger rather than quietly overwriting the number. ### Bills of materials, versioned A bill of materials says what one unit takes. A recipe, in other words, though the app calls it a bill of materials so that is the word to look for. Quantities are per unit made, so it stays correct at any batch size, and grams convert into a material stocked in kilograms. Editing one supersedes it rather than rewriting it, so a run from last month still shows what it actually consumed. ### Production batches, planned and actual Start a batch and the material is reserved: still on the shelf, but spoken for, and no longer counted as free. Close it with what you actually made and what it actually took, and Stockful consumes the real quantities and writes the finished goods to Shopify. The gap between the two is yield variance, and a recipe that consistently under-yields is worth knowing about. ### Reordering that follows the chain Reorder materials answers what to buy from two directions at once: what open batches have committed, and your sales forecast walked back through your bills of materials. Finished stock you already hold, batches underway and intermediate stock all reduce it, and each material is asked about over its own lead time. Select rows and Stockful drafts the orders, one per supplier and destination. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### Can Stockful track ingredients that are not Shopify products? Yes. That is what raw materials are for. A material is held in Stockful rather than Shopify, with its own stock, unit of measure, cost, supplier and purchasing terms. Because Shopify holds no quantity for it, there is nothing to reconcile against, so accuracy comes from running your consumption through production batches and counting regularly with Count stock. ### Is a bill of materials the same as a recipe? In practice, yes. The app calls it a bill of materials, and so does the documentation, so that is the term to look for in the navigation. It records what one unit of a finished item takes, with each component's quantity and unit. Under Makes you choose either a Shopify product or a material you make rather than buy. ### What happens to past production runs when I change a bill of materials? Nothing happens to them. Editing supersedes the old version rather than rewriting it, and every batch stays attached to the version it used. Changing tomorrow's recipe never rewrites what yesterday actually consumed. ### Can a material be made from another material? Yes, and Stockful follows the chain all the way down. A cookie is made of dough and dough is made of flour, so starting a batch of cookies consumes flour through the dough, and dough you already hold reduces the flour you are told to buy. A material with a bill of materials of its own shows Made here and a Start a batch action instead of a purchase order, because there is nobody to send an order to. ### What units can I use? Kilograms, metres, litres or count, set on the material so every SKU under it converts the same way. A bill of materials can be written in whatever unit suits the recipe as long as it converts: 300 g against a kilogram-stocked material lands as 0.3 kg. Litres against a kilogram-stocked material does not convert, because that needs a density Stockful has no way to know, so the line is refused rather than guessed at. ### Does Stockful track expiry dates, lot numbers or batch traceability? No. Materials carry stock, cost and a full movement history, but there is no shelf-life or expiry dating, no lot numbering on stock, and no traceability from a finished unit back to the delivery it came from. Expiry and shelf life are later work. If you need recall-grade traceability today, Stockful is not the tool for it. ### Does raw materials tracking cost extra? No. Materials, bills of materials, production and material reordering are on every plan at no extra cost. Stockful prices on tracked SKUs and locations, not on your revenue and not per feature. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) [Stockful vs Stockie](https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=shopify-raw-materials&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Stockful vs Stockie - Shopify Inventory Compared URL: https://stockful.app/stockful-vs-stockie # Stockful vs Stockie: Which Stocky Replacement Fits Your Store? With Stocky leaving Shopify on 31 August 2026, both Stockful and Stockie position themselves as replacements. Both create purchase orders. The difference is what sits behind them: Stockie forecasts from your last 90 days, while Stockful trains five self-tuning models per SKU on up to 2 years of history, and adds daily snapshots, 100+ reports and an AI assistant. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stockful-vs-stockie&utm_content=hero) Free 14-day trial. ## Stockie vs Stockful - side by side |   | Stockie | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | Sales history behind forecasts | Last 90 days | Up to 2 years, pulled from Shopify | | Seasonality | Not advertised | Learned per product - Christmas, summer, BFCM | | Slow-moving SKUs | Not advertised | Dedicated intermittent-demand model | | Forecast accuracy tracking | Not advertised | Backtested before adoption, re-measured continuously | | Inventory history | Not advertised | Daily snapshots per variant & location, up to 2 years | | AI chat assistant | Not advertised | Ask anything - grounded in your shop data | | Report library | Dashboard, no report library | 100+ built-in reports | | Custom report builder | Not advertised | Metrics, dimensions, filters, chart | | Scheduled report delivery | Alerts only, email or Slack | Reports to any of five channels | | Low-stock alerts | Email or Slack, custom thresholds | Slack or email, custom rules, reorder points and auto-mute | | Purchase orders | Yes - generated from forecasts, PDF/CSV | Native purchase orders, one per supplier from your recommendations, with landed cost | | Supplier lead times | Stored per supplier | Per-SKU lead times, plus statistical safety stock incl. lead-time variability | | ABC analysis | Not advertised | Built-in, runs automatically | | Shopify Flow integration | Not advertised | 10 triggers and 9 actions | | Pricing | From $4.99/mo; forecasting features on higher tiers | From $19.99/mo; every feature on every plan | ## Where Stockful goes deeper ### 2 years of history, not 90 days Stockie's forecasting analyses your last 90 days of sales. Stockful trains on up to 2 years pulled from Shopify - which is what it takes to learn annual patterns. A Christmas line's demand simply isn't visible in a 90-day window. ### Five models, chosen per SKU Baseline, trend, day-of-week, annual seasonality and an intermittent-demand model for slow movers. A richer model is adopted only when it beats the baseline on a backtest of that SKU's own history, and accuracy is re-measured continuously. ### A full visibility layer Daily snapshots of every variant at every location, 100+ built-in reports plus a builder for your own, ABC analysis, dead stock detection, anomaly alerts with likely causes, and per-location health scores. Stockie gives you a dashboard and low-stock alerts; this is the reporting layer underneath. ### An AI assistant on every plan Ask what to reorder before the weekend, why a SKU spiked, or what's at risk this week - grounded in your live shop data. One-click health checks and plain-English explanations on every metric. FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### What's the main difference between Stockful and Stockie? Depth. Both create purchase orders in-app, with supplier records and low-stock alerts. Stockie forecasts from your last 90 days of sales; Stockful trains five candidate models per SKU on up to 2 years of history pulled from Shopify, learns seasonality per product, and captures daily snapshots per variant and location, plus 100+ schedulable reports, ABC analysis, Shopify Flow integration and an AI assistant. Purchasing goes further too: partial receipts, and shipping and duties allocated across units for true landed cost. ### Which is cheaper? Stockie starts lower ($4.99/mo), with its forecasting features on higher tiers up to $59.99/mo. Stockful runs $19.99-$79.99/mo based on tracked SKUs and locations, with every feature - forecasting, AI, purchase orders, reports, alerts - on every plan. Both offer 14-day free trials, so you can run them side by side on your own data. ### Why does forecast history depth matter? Because seasonal demand repeats yearly. A forecast built on the last 90 days can follow recent velocity, but it can't see that a product peaks every December or dies every summer - that pattern only exists in year-plus history. Stockful pulls up to 2 years of sales from Shopify at install and learns each product's seasonal shape, with no manual 'same period last year' setup. ### Can Stockful create purchase orders like Stockie? Both create purchase orders in-app. Stockful groups your reorder recommendations into one draft order per supplier, priced from that supplier's list, and sends it as a branded PDF or by email. You receive stock as it arrives - in transit, accept or reject, partial receipts - and shipping, duties and fees allocate across units for a true landed cost that feeds your average cost and margins. It works alongside Shopify inventory and Shopify POS, and landed cost can sync back to Shopify's cost per item. ### Which is the better Stocky replacement? Both replace Stocky's purchase orders, so the question is what else you need. Stockie is the lighter option if POs and basic reordering were all you used Stocky for. Stockful covers the same purchasing ground - suppliers, price lists, receiving, landed cost - and adds the rest of what Stocky did: daily snapshots, 100+ reports, forecasting on 2 years of history, ABC analysis and alerts. It also imports your Stocky suppliers and purchase-order history directly, which has to happen before Stocky's API shuts down on 31 August 2026. ### Does Stockie have reports like Stockful? Stockie is built around an inventory dashboard and low-stock alerts rather than a report library, and its email and Slack delivery is for those alerts. Stockful has 100+ built-in reports that run live against your current data, a builder for anything the library does not cover, and scheduled delivery of any report to email, Slack, a webhook, Google Sheets or Airtable. ## Explore more [AI Inventory Assistant](https://stockful.app/ai) [Shopify Inventory Management](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-management) [Shopify Inventory Tracking](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-tracking) [Shopify Inventory Reports](https://stockful.app/shopify-inventory-reports) [Multi-Location Inventory](https://stockful.app/shopify-multi-location-inventory) [Shopify Demand Forecasting](https://stockful.app/shopify-demand-forecasting) [Shopify Purchase Orders](https://stockful.app/shopify-purchase-orders) [Raw Materials & BOMs](https://stockful.app/shopify-raw-materials) [ABC Analysis for Shopify](https://stockful.app/shopify-abc-analysis) [Stocky Alternative](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) [Migrate from Stocky](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) [Inventory Planner Alternative](https://stockful.app/inventory-planner-alternative) [Prediko Alternative](https://stockful.app/prediko-alternative) ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stockful-vs-stockie&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Stocky Alternative for Shopify: Import Your Data | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative The Stocky replacement # The Best Stocky Alternative for Shopify Stocky leaves Shopify on 31 August 2026. Stockful is the Stocky alternative that picks up the inventory monitoring, reports, forecasting, alerts and purchase orders you relied on, then adds an AI assistant Stocky never had. The seasonality you set by hand with 'same period last year' purchase orders? Learned automatically, per product. Live in minutes, and the import wizard brings your suppliers and history across. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-alternative&utm_content=hero) [See the full comparison→](#compare) Free 14-day trial ★ **5.0** on the Shopify App Store ![Stockful dashboard replacing Stocky: inventory monitoring, reports and forecasts](https://stockful.app/img/screenshots/hero.webp) What's happening to Stocky ## Stocky is retiring on 31 August 2026. Shopify is removing Stocky. If you rely on it to watch stock, report and forecast, you need a replacement in place before the cutoff. The deadline ### Gone on 31 Aug 2026 After that date Stocky is no longer available in Shopify. There's no extension and no automatic replacement for its monitoring and reporting. What you lose ### Your visibility, overnight Daily stock tracking, history, built-in reports, forecasting, low-stock alerts and your purchase-order workflow all disappear with it. Your suppliers, price lists and purchase-order history go with the API and can't be recovered afterwards. What to do ### Switch before you have to Install a replacement now and it arrives with a year of daily stock history and two years of sales history already backfilled - so you move across with everything running, not starting over. Purchasing ### Purchase orders, built in Stockful has native purchase orders: suppliers with full price lists, one draft order per supplier from your recommendations, sending by PDF or email, receiving with partial receipts, and true landed cost. Your Stocky purchase-order history imports too. Migrating from Stocky ## Switch to your Stocky alternative in three steps. Install, import your Stocky data if you want it, and go. The import never touches your live inventory. 01 #### Install Stockful One click from the Shopify App Store. Then bring your Stocky suppliers, price lists and purchase-order history across with the import wizard. 02 #### Two years of history, day one Stockful backfills up to a year of daily stock history and two years of your Shopify sales history at install, then captures a snapshot of every variant and location daily from there. Reports and forecasts don't start from zero. 03 #### Set alerts and go Reorder points, Slack alerts and scheduled reports are live in minutes. You're covered well before the cutoff. Bringing your data ### Already have suppliers and history in Stocky? The import wizard brings your suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments across - and it has to run before Stocky's API shuts down. [See the migration tool→](https://stockful.app/stocky-migration) Stocky vs Stockful ## The monitoring half of Stocky. Made smarter. Everything Stocky did for tracking and reporting, plus the AI and history it never had. |   | Stocky | stockful. | | --- | --- | --- | | AI chat assistant | No | Ask anything, grounded in your shop | | One-click health check | No | Scans 5 dimensions, 25 findings | | Explain every metric | No | Plain-English on every value | | Anomaly detection | No | Spikes & drops with likely causes | | Daily inventory snapshots | No history | Per variant & location, up to 2 years | | Reports | Limited built-in | 100+ reports, scheduled delivery | | ABC analysis | No | Built-in, runs automatically | | Demand forecasting | Basic - seasonality set by hand | Seasonality learned per product, self-tracked accuracy | | Slack alerts | No | Custom rules & reorder points | | Purchase orders | Yes - retiring with Stocky | Native: suppliers, receiving, landed cost | | Shopify Flow integration | No | 10 triggers, 9 actions | 5.0 on the Shopify App Store Loved by the merchants who switched. Stockful's been a great help to us with its reporting features. We've been able to remove annoying workflows that helped us track our inventory and replace them all with this one app. Having daily and weekly reports exported and automatically sent to the right people really helped us to stay in sync with our inventory. **Bohomoon** Shopify App Store review Love this app - extremely helpful for keeping an eye on inventory velocities and reorder notifications. UI is very nice and intuitive, and the data is presented clearly. I wish we had this app years ago. **ALP Pouches** Shopify App Store review Really impressed with Stockful. The app is simple to set up and easy to use day-to-day. I requested a feature from the developer and it was live in the app in under a week. Setting up notifications in Slack was straightforward, so I no longer have to manually check inventory levels. It just runs in the background and pings me when something needs attention. Highly recommended. **Krisesikker.no** Shopify App Store review Pricing ## Every feature on every plan. Plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. No feature gating, AI included, 14-day free trial. ### Included on every plan AI, forecasting, purchasing, analytics and alerts on all tiers. AI usage allowance scales with the plan you choose. - AI assistant, health check, explain - Anomaly detection with likely causes - Self-tuning, seasonality-aware forecasts - Purchase orders with suppliers and price lists - Landed cost, multi-currency and receiving - Up to 2 years of daily history - Scheduled reports and Slack alerts - Storefront data and Flow integration - Raw materials, BOMs and production Starter For stores ready to scale $19.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 2,000 tracked SKUs - 1 location [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-alternative&utm_content=pricing-starter) Growth Most popular For growing stores with multiple locations $39.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 7,500 tracked SKUs - Up to 5 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-alternative&utm_content=pricing-growth) Pro For large stores with advanced needs $79.99 /mo \+ $5 per 500 additional SKUs \+ $5 per additional location 14-day free trial - 15,000 tracked SKUs - Up to 10 locations [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-alternative&utm_content=pricing-pro) FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### Is Stocky really being discontinued? Yes. Shopify is removing Stocky on 31 August 2026, so merchants relying on it for inventory monitoring, reporting and forecasting need a replacement in place before then. ### Can I use Stockful as a direct Stocky replacement? Yes, for everything you used Stocky to track: daily history, reports, forecasting, low-stock alerts and transfer suggestions - plus native purchase orders with suppliers, price lists, receiving and landed cost, and an AI assistant on top that Stocky never had. ### Can I bring my data across from Stocky? Yes. Stockful's import wizard connects to Stocky's API and brings across your suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments. Everything imports as net-new records, so re-running it never duplicates, and it never touches your live inventory. Stocky's API goes away on 31 August 2026, so the import has to happen before then. ### Does Stockful use AI? Yes. You can chat with your shop to ask what to reorder or why demand moved, run one-click health checks, get plain-English explanations on every metric, and see anomaly alerts with likely causes. ### How does pricing work? Transparent tiers with every feature included on every plan, plans differ only by tracked SKUs and locations. There's a 14-day free trial to start. ## Move off Stocky before you have to. Install Stockful and you start with a year of daily stock history already in place, not an empty chart. Switch with a working replacement in hand well before 31 August 2026. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-alternative&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) 14-day free trial --- # Stocky Migration Tool for Shopify | Stockful URL: https://stockful.app/stocky-migration Stocky migration # Migrate From Stocky to Stockful Stocky and its API are removed from Shopify on 31 August 2026. Stockful's guided import wizard brings your suppliers, price lists, purchase-order history and stock adjustments across in minutes - without touching a single unit of live stock. On the other side, you land on native purchase orders. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-migration&utm_content=hero) [Read the migration guide→](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/purchasing/migrating-from-stocky) Free 14-day trial ★ **5.0** on the Shopify App Store 8 days until Stocky's API shuts down ## The import reads from Stocky's API. It goes on 31 August 2026. Stockful pulls your history directly out of Stocky, so the migration has to run while Stocky is still switched on. Once the API is off, your suppliers, price lists and purchase-order history can't be recovered. What comes across ## Your purchasing history, not just a product list. The wizard pulls the records you built up in Stocky and rebuilds them inside Stockful. Your Shopify sales history comes across separately - up to two years of it, pulled at install - so forecasts and reports work from day one. Suppliers ### Suppliers and price lists Every supplier with its full price list - supplier SKU, cost, pack size, minimum order quantity, lead time, primary supplier and minimum order value - ready to order against on day one. Purchase orders ### Historical purchase orders Past orders arrive as closed records with landed cost reconstructed, so what you actually paid per unit survives the move and keeps feeding your average cost. Adjustments ### Stock adjustments Your stock corrections come across as numbered adjustment documents - the same paper trail you kept in Stocky, ready for the next audit. Records only ### Nothing live is touched History imports as records. Your live inventory levels stay exactly as Shopify has them; the wizard never writes a stock change. How it works ## Connect, review, import. A guided wizard inside Stockful. Nothing moves until you say so. 01 ### Connect Stocky Paste your Stocky API credentials. Add CSV exports too if you have them - optional, and useful for anything the API doesn't expose. 02 ### Review what will import See exactly what the wizard found - suppliers, price lists, purchase orders and adjustments - and what it will create, before anything is written. 03 ### Commit The import runs and your records appear in Stockful. Everything arrives as net-new, so running it again never duplicates. [Read the full migration guide ›](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/purchasing/migrating-from-stocky) Safe by design ## You can run it twice and nothing breaks. The wizard is built to be re-run. It creates net-new records and leaves your live stock alone, so a partial or repeated import is never a mess to clean up afterwards. What the import guarantees Live inventory is never written to - history arrives as records only Everything imports as net-new, so re-running never duplicates You review the full plan before anything is committed Optional CSV exports fill in anything Stocky's API doesn't expose After the move ## You land on native purchase orders. Stockful doesn't hand purchasing back to Shopify. Orders are created, sent, received and costed in the app - so the history you just imported has somewhere to continue. Build an order from your reorder recommendations, grouped one draft per supplier Send a branded PDF, print packing slips, or email the supplier directly Receive in transit, accept or reject, take partial receipts, then close Shipping, duties and fees allocate across units for true landed cost Buy in the supplier's currency, track payments, tag and archive orders Works with Shopify inventory and Shopify POS [Purchase orders in the docs ›](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/purchasing/purchase-orders) [Suppliers and price lists ›](https://docs.stockful.app/user-guide/purchasing/suppliers) ## Weighing up the move? This page is the how. If you're still deciding, the comparison covers what you gain and what changes when you leave Stocky. [See the full comparison→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) FAQ ## Frequently asked questions ### How long does the migration take? Minutes for most shops. The wizard reads from Stocky's API, shows you what it found, and imports once you commit. A larger history takes longer to pull, but you don't have to sit and watch it. ### Will it change my live stock levels? No. The import writes records only - suppliers, price lists, closed purchase orders and adjustment documents. Your live inventory in Shopify is never touched by the migration. ### What happens if I run the import twice? Nothing duplicates. Everything the wizard creates is net-new, so a repeated or partial run is safe. It's designed to be re-run if something was missed the first time. ### What exactly comes across from Stocky? Suppliers and their full price lists, historical purchase orders as closed records with landed cost reconstructed, and your stock adjustments as numbered adjustment documents. The migration guide has the full detail. ### Do I need CSV exports from Stocky? Not usually - the API covers the migration on its own. CSV exports are optional and can fill in anything the API doesn't expose. Worth taking while Stocky is still available, just in case. ### What if I wait until after 31 August 2026? The import won't be able to run. It reads directly from Stocky's API, and both Stocky and its API are removed from Shopify on that date. Anything not migrated by then is gone. ## Bring Stocky with you. Import your suppliers, price lists and purchase-order history, then pick up where you left off on native purchase orders. [Start free trial](https://apps.shopify.com/stockful-inventory-management?utm_source=stockful-website&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=stocky-migration&utm_content=bottom-cta) [See how Stockful compares→](https://stockful.app/stocky-alternative) Free 14-day trial